Sony Film Camera ILCE 7RM2 User Manual

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera  
ILCE-7RM2  
How to Use  
Before Use  
Names of parts  
Icons and indicators  
Using the strap  
Attaching the eyepiece cup  
Adjusting the viewfinder  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Viewing images  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Messages  
Messages  
Situations this product has difficulty handling  
Situations this product has difficulty handling  
[1] How to Use  
Before Use  
Names of parts  
Checking the camera and the supplied items  
The number in parentheses indicates the number of pieces.  
Camera (1)  
AC Adaptor (1)  
The shape of the AC Adaptor differs for each country/region.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BC-VW1 Battery charger (1)  
Power cord (mains lead) (1)* (not supplied in the U.S.A. and Canada)  
*
Multiple power cords may be supplied with your camera. Use the appropriate one that  
matches your country/region.  
NP-FW50 Rechargeable battery pack (2)  
Micro USB Cable (1)  
Shoulder strap (1)  
Body cap (1) (Attached on the camera)  
Cable protector (1)  
Shoe cap (1) (Attached on the camera)  
Eyepiece cup (1) (Attached on the camera)  
Instruction Manual (1)  
Wi-Fi Connection/One-touch (NFC) Guide (1)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[2] How to Use  
Before Use  
Names of parts  
Identifying parts (Front side)  
When the lens is removed  
1. ON/OFF (Power) switch/Shutter button  
2. Front dial  
3. Remote sensor  
4. Wi-Fi antenna (built-in)  
5. Lens release button  
6. Built-in microphone*  
7. AF Illuminator/Self-timer lamp  
8. Mount index  
9. Image sensor**  
10. Mount  
11. Lens contacts**  
*
Do not cover this part during movie recording. Doing so may cause noise or lower the volume.  
**  
Do not directly touch these parts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[3] How to Use  
Before Use  
Names of parts  
Identifying parts (Rear side)  
1. Eyepiece cup  
2. Viewfinder  
3. MENU button  
4. Eye sensor  
5. Monitor  
You can adjust the monitor to an easily viewable angle and shoot from any  
position.  
6. Diopter-adjustment dial  
Adjust the diopter-adjustment dial according to your eyesight until the  
display appears clearly in the viewfinder.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. For shooting: C3 (Custom 3) button  
For viewing: (Enlarge) button  
8. AF/MF/AEL switch lever  
9. Rear dial  
10. For shooting: AF/MF (Auto focus/manual focus) button/ AEL button  
For viewing:  
(Image index) button  
11. MOVIE (Movie) button  
12. For shooting: Fn button  
For viewing:  
(Send to Smartphone) button  
You can display the screen for [Send to Smartphone] by pressing this  
button.  
13. Control wheel  
14. For shooting: C4 (Custom 4) button  
For viewing:  
(Delete) button  
15. Access lamp  
16.  
(Playback) button  
[4] How to Use  
Before Use  
Names of parts  
Identifying parts (Top side/Side view)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1.  
Image sensor position mark  
2. Speaker  
3.  
4.  
(Microphone) jack  
When an external microphone is connected, the microphone is turned on  
automatically. If the external microphone is a plug-in-power type, the  
power of the microphone is supplied by the camera.  
(Headphones) jack  
5. Multi/Micro USB Terminal*  
Supports Micro USB compatible device.  
6. Charge lamp  
7. HDMI micro jack  
8. Multi interface shoe*  
Some of the accessories may not be inserted fully and protrude backward  
from the Multi interface shoe. However, when the accessory reaches the  
front end of the shoe, the connection is completed.  
9. Mode dial/Mode dial lock release button  
10. C2 (Custom 2) button  
11. C1 (Custom 1) button  
12. Exposure compensation dial  
13. Hooks for shoulder strap  
Attach both ends of the strap onto the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14.  
(N mark)  
This mark indicates the touch point for connecting the camera and an  
NFC-enabled Smartphone.  
For details on the location of the  
(N mark) on your Smartphone, refer  
to the operating instructions of the Smartphone.  
NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-  
range wireless communication technology.  
15. Memory card cover  
16. Memory card slot  
*
For details on compatible accessories for the multi interface shoe and the Multi/Micro USB  
Terminal, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service  
facility.  
You can also use accessories that are compatible with the accessory shoe. Operations with other  
manufactures’ accessories are not guaranteed.  
Attaching the cable protector  
Use the cable protector to prevent the HDMI cable from being disconnected when  
shooting images connected by the HDMI cable. Open both of the jack covers and  
insert an HDMI cable into the camera. Attach the cable protector as illustrated so  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
that the edge of the cable protector fits in the slit (A) to the left of the  
(microphone) jack. Secure the cable protector with the attachment screw (B).  
Then secure the HDMI cable with the fixing dial (C).  
[5] How to Use  
Before Use  
Names of parts  
Identifying parts (Bottom view)  
1. Battery insertion slot  
2. Battery cover  
3. Tripod socket hole  
Use a tripod with a screw less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inches) long. Otherwise,  
you cannot firmly secure the camera, and damage to the camera may  
occur.  
4. Battery cover locking button  
5. Battery cover release lever  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connection plate cover  
Use this when using an AC-PW20 AC Adaptor (sold separately). Insert the  
connection plate into the battery compartment, and then pass the cord through  
the connection plate cover as shown below.  
Make sure that the cord is not pinched when you close the cover.  
[6] How to Use  
Before Use  
Icons and indicators  
List of icons on the screen  
The displayed contents and their positions shown below are just a guideline, and  
may differ from the actual display.  
Monitor mode  
Viewfinder mode  
In Auto Mode or Scene Selection mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
P/A/S/M/Sweep Panorama mode  
For playback  
Basic information display  
Histogram display  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.  
P P* A S M  
Shooting mode  
Register number  
Scene Recognition icons  
NO CARD  
Memory card/Upload  
100  
Remaining number of recordable images  
Aspect ratio of still images  
42M / 36M / 18M / 15M / 11M / 8.9M / 4.5M / 3.8M  
Image size of still images  
Image quality of still images  
Frame rate of movies  
Record setting of movies  
Remaining battery  
Remaining battery warning  
USB power supply  
Flash charge in progress  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APS-C/Super 35mm  
Setting Effect OFF  
AF Illuminator  
NFC is activated  
Airplane Mode  
No audio recording of movies  
Wind Noise Reduction  
SteadyShot Off/On, Camera shake warning  
SteadyShot focal length/Camera shake warning  
Overheating warning  
Database file full/Database file error  
Smart Zoom/  
View Mode  
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom  
100-0003  
Folder-file number  
Protect  
File format of movies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DPOF  
DPOF set  
Auto object framing image  
Dual Video REC  
PC Remote  
Silent Shooting  
Bright Monitoring  
Copyright information writing on  
2.  
Drive mode  
Flash mode/Red-eye reduction  
±0.0  
Flash compensation  
Focus mode  
Focus area  
Smile/Face Detect.  
Metering mode  
35mm  
Lens focal length  
7500K A5 G5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
White balance (Auto, Preset, Underwater Auto, Custom, Color temperature,  
Color filter)  
D-Range Optimizer/Auto HDR  
+3 +3 +3  
Creative Style/Contrast, Saturation, Sharpness  
Picture Effect  
Smile detection sensitivity indicator  
Picture Profile  
Copyright information exists for image  
3.  
Lock-on AF  
Guide display for Lock-on AF  
Bracket indicator  
Exposure compensation/Metered Manual  
STBY  
Movie recording standby  
REC 0:12  
Recording time of the movie (m:s)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Focus  
1/250  
Shutter speed  
F3.5  
Aperture Value  
ISO400  
ISO AUTO  
ISO sensitivity  
AE lock/FEL lock  
Shutter speed indicator  
Aperture indicator  
Histogram  
Digital level gauge  
Audio level  
OFF  
DRO/Auto HDR/Auto HDR image warning  
Picture Effect error  
2015-1-1  
10:37AM  
Date of recording  
3/7  
File number/Number of images in the view mode  
REC Control  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spot metering area  
00:00:00:00  
Time code (hour:minute:second:frame)  
00 00 00 00  
User Bit  
[7] How to Use  
Before Use  
Icons and indicators  
List of focus range finder frames  
The focus range finder frame differs as follows depending on the shooting mode.  
When using contrast AF or phase detection AF mode  
When using phase detection AF mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], and if you aim at a moving  
subject, the focus range finder frame may be displayed as above.  
When you attach an A-mount lens with a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA1 or LA-EA3)  
(sold separately) and [  
AF System] is set to [Phase Detection AF], the  
focus range finder frame is displayed as above.  
When focus is achieved automatically based on the whole range  
of the monitor  
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [Focus Area]  
setting is disabled and the focus area frame is shown by the dotted line. The  
AF operates with priority on and around the center area.  
[8] How to Use  
Before Use  
Using the strap  
Using the shoulder strap  
Attach the shoulder strap to prevent damage caused by dropping the product.  
1. Attach both ends of the strap.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[9] How to Use  
Before Use  
Attaching the eyepiece cup  
Attaching the eyepiece cup  
It is recommended that you attach the eyepiece cup when you intend to use the  
viewfinder.  
1. Match the eyepiece cup to the groove on the viewfinder and slide it into  
place.  
To remove the eyepiece cup, grasp it on the left and right sides and lift it  
up.  
[10] How to Use  
Before Use  
Adjusting the viewfinder  
Adjusting the viewfinder (diopter-adjustment)  
Adjust the diopter scale to your eyesight until the display appears clearly in the  
viewfinder. If it is difficult to turn the diopter-adjustment dial, remove the eyepiece  
cup and then adjust the dial.  
1. Turn the diopter-adjustment dial.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[11] How to Use  
Before Use  
In-Camera guide  
About the [In-Camera Guide]  
The [In-Camera Guide] displays descriptions of MENU items, Fn (Function)  
button, and settings, and if a function cannot be set, the reason why.  
1. Press the MENU or Fn button.  
2. Select the desired MENU item using up/down/left/right side on the control  
wheel.  
3. Press the button to which the [In-Camera Guide] function is assigned.  
The operation guide for the MENU item you have selected in step 2 is  
displayed.  
If you press the  
on the center of the control wheel after selecting an  
item shown in gray, the reason the item cannot be set is displayed.  
Note  
Assign the [In-Camera Guide] function to a button in advance using the  
[Custom Key Settings].  
[12] How to Use  
Preparing the camera  
Charging the battery pack  
Charging the battery pack using a charger  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
When using the camera for the first time, be sure to charge the InfoLITHIUM NP-  
FW50 (supplied). The InfoLITHIUM battery pack can be charged even when it is  
not fully depleted. It can also be used when it is not fully charged. The charged  
battery pack discharges little by little even when it is not being used. To avoid  
missing a shooting opportunity, charge the battery pack again before shooting.  
1. Insert the battery pack into the battery charger.  
Push the battery pack lightly until it clicks.  
2. Connect the battery charger to the wall outlet (wall socket).  
For the U.S.A. and Canada  
For countries/regions other than the U.S.A. and Canada  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Light on: Charging  
Light off: Charge completed  
Charging time (Full charge): Approx. 250 minutes  
When charging a fully depleted battery pack at a temperature of 25°C  
(77°F).  
The CHARGE lamp (A) turns off when charging is completed.  
Note  
The charging time differs depending on the remaining charge of the battery  
pack and on the charging conditions.  
Be sure to use only genuine Sony brand battery packs.  
We recommend charging the battery pack at an ambient temperature of  
between 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F). You may not be able to efficiently  
charge the battery pack outside this temperature range.  
Connect the battery charger to the nearest wall outlet (wall socket). If  
malfunctions occur while using the charger, disconnect the plug from the wall  
outlet (wall socket) immediately to disconnect from the power source.  
Even when the CHARGE lamp of this battery charger is off, the power is not  
disconnected. If any trouble occurs while this unit is in use, unplug it from the  
wall outlet (wall socket) to disconnect the power.  
When the camera is being used for the first time or when you use a battery  
pack that has not been used for a long time, the CHARGE lamp may flash  
quickly when the battery is charged for the first time. If this happens, remove  
the battery pack from the charger and then re-insert it to recharge.  
Do not continuously or repeatedly charge the battery pack without using it if it is  
already fully charged or close to fully charged. Doing so may cause a  
deterioration in battery performance.  
[13] How to Use  
Preparing the camera  
Charging the battery pack  
Inserting the battery pack into the camera  
How to insert the battery pack into the camera  
1. Open the battery cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Insert the battery pack while pressing the lock lever (A) with the tip of the  
battery until the battery locks into place.  
3. Close the cover.  
[14] How to Use  
Preparing the camera  
Charging the battery pack  
Charging the battery pack while it is inserted in the  
camera  
When using the camera for the first time, be sure to charge the battery pack. The  
charged battery pack will discharge little by little, even if you do not use it. To  
avoid missing a shooting opportunity, charge the battery pack before shooting.  
1. Turn the power OFF.  
2. Connect the camera with the battery pack inserted to the AC Adaptor  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(supplied) using the micro USB cable (supplied), and connect the AC  
Adaptor to the wall outlet (wall socket).  
Charge lamp  
Lit: Charging  
Off: Charging finished  
Flashing: Charging error or charging paused temporarily because the  
camera is not within the proper temperature range  
If the charge lamp lights up once and then immediately turns off, the  
battery pack is fully charged.  
Charging time (Full charge)  
The charging time is approximately 150 min. using the AC Adaptor (supplied).  
The charging time may differ depending on the remaining capacity of the  
battery pack or the charging conditions.  
The battery pack can be charged even when it is not fully depleted.  
The above charging time applies when charging a fully depleted battery pack  
(supplied) at a temperature of 25°C (77°F). Charging may take longer  
depending on the conditions of use and the environment.  
Note  
If the charge lamp flashes when the battery pack is not fully charged, remove  
the battery pack or disconnect the USB cable from the camera and then re-  
insert it to recharge.  
If the charge lamp on the camera flashes when the AC Adaptor is connected to  
the wall outlet (wall socket), this indicates that charging is temporarily stopped  
because the temperature is outside the recommended range. When the  
temperature gets back within the appropriate range, the charging resumes. We  
recommend charging the battery pack at an ambient temperature of between  
10°C to 30°C (50ºF to 86ºF).  
Connect the AC Adaptor to the nearest wall outlet (wall socket). If malfunctions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
occur while using the AC Adaptor, immediately disconnect the plug from the  
wall outlet (wall socket) to disconnect from the power source.  
When you use a completely new battery pack or a battery pack that has not  
been used for a long time, the charge lamp may flash quickly when the battery  
is charged for the first time. If this happens, remove the battery pack or  
disconnect the USB cable from the camera and then re-insert it to recharge.  
Do not continuously or repeatedly charge the battery pack without using it if it is  
already fully charged or close to fully charged. Doing so may cause a  
deterioration in battery performance.  
When charging is finished, disconnect the AC Adaptor from the wall outlet (wall  
socket).  
Be sure to use only genuine Sony brand battery packs, micro USB cables  
(supplied) and AC Adaptors (supplied).  
[15] How to Use  
Preparing the camera  
Charging the battery pack  
Charging by connecting to a computer  
The battery pack can be charged by connecting the camera to a computer using a  
micro USB cable.  
1. Turn off the product, and connect to the USB terminal of the computer.  
Note  
Note the following points when charging via a computer:  
If the product is connected to a laptop computer that is not connected to a power  
source, the laptop battery level decreases. Do not leave the product connected to a  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
laptop computer for an extended period of time.  
Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode  
when a USB connection has been established between the computer and the camera.  
Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or  
waking the computer from sleep mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.  
Proper operation cannot be guaranteed on all types of computers.  
Charging cannot be guaranteed with a custom-built computer, modified computer, or a  
computer connected through a USB hub.  
The camera may not operate correctly when other USB devices are used at the same  
time.  
[16] How to Use  
Preparing the camera  
Charging the battery pack  
Battery life and the number of images that can be  
recorded/played back using a battery pack  
Screen mode  
Shooting (still images):  
Number of images: approx. 340  
Actual shooting (movies):  
Battery life: approx. 55 min.  
Continuous shooting (movies):  
Battery life: approx. 95 min.  
Viewing (still images):  
Battery life: approx. 280 min., Number of images: approx. 5600  
Viewfinder mode  
Shooting (still images):  
Number of images: approx. 290  
Actual shooting (movies):  
Battery life: approx. 50 min.  
Continuous shooting (movies):  
Battery life: approx. 95 min.  
Note  
The above battery life and number of images applies when the battery pack has  
been fully charged. The battery life and number of images may decrease  
depending on the conditions of use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The battery life and number of images that can be recorded is for shooting  
under the following conditions:  
The battery pack is used at an ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F).  
Using the lens FE 28-70mm F3.5-5.6 OSS (sold separately)  
Using Sony Memory Stick PRO Duo (Mark2) media (sold separately)  
[Viewfinder Bright.]: [Manual][±0]  
[Monitor Brightness]: [Manual][±0]  
[Display Quality]: [Standard]  
The number for “Shooting (still images)” is based on the CIPA standard, and is  
for shooting under the following conditions (CIPA: Camera & Imaging Products  
Association):  
DISP: [Display All Info.]  
Focus Mode: AF-S  
One picture is taken every 30 seconds.  
The power is turned on and off once every ten times.  
The number of minutes for movie shooting is based on the CIPA standard, and  
is for shooting under the following conditions:  
The image quality is set to 60i 17M (FH) .  
Actual shooting (movies): Battery life based on repeated shooting, zooming, shooting  
stand-by, turning on/off, etc.  
Continuous movie shooting: Battery life based on non-stop shooting until the limit (29  
minutes) has been reached, and then continued by pressing the MOVIE (Movie)  
button again. Other functions, such as zooming, are not used.  
If the remaining battery is not displayed, press the DISP (Display Setting).  
[17] How to Use  
Preparing the camera  
Charging the battery pack  
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)  
By using the supplied AC adaptor, you can shoot and playback images while the  
power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket) without using up the battery  
power.  
1. Insert the battery pack into the camera.  
2. Connect the camera to the wall outlet (wall socket) with a micro USB cable  
(supplied) and an AC adaptor (supplied).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
The camera will not activate if there is no remaining battery. Insert a sufficiently  
charged battery pack into the camera.  
If you use the camera while power is being supplied from a wall outlet (wall  
socket), make sure that the icon (  
) displays on the monitor.  
Do not remove the battery pack while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall  
socket). If you remove the battery pack, the camera will be turned off.  
Do not remove the battery pack while the access lamp is lit. The data in the  
memory card may be damaged.  
As long as the power is on, the battery pack will not be charged even if the  
camera is connected to the AC Adaptor.  
Under certain conditions, power may be supplied from the battery pack  
supplementarily even if you are using the AC adaptor.  
Do not remove the Micro USB cable while power is supplied from a wall outlet  
(wall socket). Before you remove the Micro USB cable, turn off the camera.  
Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the continuous recording  
time may be shortened while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket).  
When using a mobile charger as a power source, confirm that it is fully charged  
before use. Also, be careful of the remaining power on the mobile charger  
during use.  
[18] How to Use  
Preparing the camera  
Charging the battery pack  
Removing the battery pack  
How to remove the battery pack  
1. Make sure that the access lamp is not lit, and turn off the camera.  
2. Slide lock lever (A) and remove the battery pack.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Be careful not to drop the battery pack.  
[19] How to Use  
Preparing the camera  
Inserting a memory card (sold separately)  
Inserting a memory card  
How to insert a memory card  
1. Open the memory card cover.  
2. Insert the memory card.  
Ensure that the notched corner is facing in the correct direction.  
With the notched corner facing in the direction illustrated, insert the  
memory card until it clicks into place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Close the memory card cover.  
Hint  
When you use a memory card with this product for the first time, it is  
recommended that you format the card using the product for stable  
performance of the memory card.  
[20] How to Use  
Preparing the camera  
Inserting a memory card (sold separately)  
Removing the memory card  
How to remove the memory card  
1. Open the memory card cover.  
2. Make sure that the access lamp (A) is not lit.  
3. Push in on the memory card once to remove it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Close the memory card cover.  
[21] How to Use  
Preparing the camera  
Inserting a memory card (sold separately)  
Usable memory cards  
You can use the following types of memory cards with this camera.  
For movies, refer to “Memory cards that can be used for movie recording” on this  
page.  
Usable Memory Stick media  
Memory Stick PRO Duo / Memory Stick PRO Duo (Mark2)  
Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo  
Memory Stick Micro (M2) (Mark2)  
*Memory Stick media with a capacity of up to 32 GB have been tested and proven  
to operate with this camera.  
Usable SD cards  
SD memory card / SDHC memory card  
SDXC memory card  
microSD memory card / microSDHC memory card  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
microSDXC memory card  
*SD cards with a capacity of up to 128 GB have been tested and proven to  
operate with this camera.  
Memory cards that can be used for movie recording  
When shooting movies in XAVC S format  
SDXC memory card or microSDXC memory card with a capacity of 64 GB or more  
(SD Speed Class 10, or UHS Speed Class U1 or faster)  
When recording in 100 Mbps or more, an UHS-I-compatible SDXC memory  
card or microSDXC memory card with a capacity of 64 GB or more (UHS  
Speed Class U3) is required.  
When shooting movies in AVCHD or MP4 format  
Memory Stick PRO Duo (Mark2)  
Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo  
Memory Stick Micro (M2) (Mark2)  
SD memory card / microSD memory card (SD Speed Class 4 or faster, or UHS  
Speed Class U1 or faster)  
SDHC memory card / microSDHC memory card (SD Speed Class 4 or faster,  
or UHS Speed Class U1 or faster)  
SDXC memory card / microSDXC memory card (SD Speed Class 4 or faster, or  
UHS Speed Class U1 or faster)  
Note  
Not all memory cards are guaranteed to operate correctly.  
When you use a memory card with the camera for the first time, it is  
recommended that you format the card on the camera before use for more  
stable performance of the memory card.  
Note that formatting erases all data on the memory card permanently, and is  
irreversible. Save valuable data on a computer, etc.  
Images recorded on an SDXC memory card cannot be imported to or played on  
computers or AV devices that are not compatible with exFAT when connected  
using a micro USB cable. Make sure that the device is compatible with exFAT  
before connecting it to the camera. If you connect your camera to an  
incompatible device, you may be prompted to format the card. Never format  
the card in response to this prompt, as doing so will erase all data on the card.  
(exFAT is the file system used on SDXC memory cards.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[22] How to Use  
Preparing the camera  
Attaching a lens  
Attaching a lens  
Set the power switch of the camera to OFF before attaching the lens.  
1. Remove the body cap (A) from the camera and the rear lens cap (B) from the  
rear of the lens.  
When changing the lens, work quickly in a dust-free location to keep dust  
or debris from getting inside the camera.  
When shooting, remove the front lens cap from the front of the lens.  
2. Mount the lens by aligning the two white index marks (mounting indexes) on  
the lens and camera.  
Hold the camera with the lens facing down to prevent dust and debris from  
entering the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. While pushing the lens lightly toward the camera, turn the lens slowly in the  
direction of the arrow until it clicks into the locked position.  
Be sure to hold the lens straight when attaching it.  
Note  
Do not press the lens release button when attaching a lens.  
Do not use force when attaching a lens.  
A Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is required to use an A-mount lens (sold  
separately). When using the Mount Adaptor, refer to the operating manual  
supplied with the Mount Adaptor.  
If you want to shoot full-frame images, use a full-frame size compatible lens.  
When you use a lens with a tripod socket, attach a tripod to the tripod socket of  
the lens to help balance the weight of the lens.  
When carrying the camera with a lens attached, hold both the camera and the  
lens firmly.  
Do not hold the part of the lens that is extended for zoom or focus adjustment.  
[23] How to Use  
Preparing the camera  
Attaching a lens  
Removing the lens  
Set the power switch of the camera to OFF before you remove the lens.  
1. Keep pressing the lens release button (A) and turn the lens in the direction of  
the arrow until it stops.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Attach the lens caps to the front and rear of the lens and the body cap to the  
camera.  
Remove any dust from the caps before attaching them.  
[24] How to Use  
Preparing the camera  
Attaching a lens  
Attaching the lens hood  
We recommend that you use the lens hood to prevent light outside the shooting  
frame from affecting the image.  
1. Match the shape of the lens hood mounting part and lens head, and turn the  
lens hood clockwise until it clicks.  
Note  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attach the lens hood properly. Otherwise, the lens hood may not have any  
effect or may be partially reflected in the image.  
When the lens hood is attached properly, the lens hood index (red line)  
matches the red index mark on the hood. (There may be no lens hood index on  
some lenses.)  
Remove the lens hood when using the flash. Otherwise, the lens hood blocks  
the flash light and may appear as a shadow on the image.  
To store the lens hood after shooting, attach the lens hood to the lens  
backward.  
[25] How to Use  
Preparing the camera  
Attaching a lens  
Notes on changing the lens  
When changing the lens, if dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to  
the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to an electric  
signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting  
environment.  
This camera is equipped with an anti-dust function that causes the image sensor  
to vibrate a little when the power is turned off, and the camera’s image sensor is  
coated with an anti-dust coating to prevent dust from adhering to the image  
sensor. However, always make sure to attach/remove the lens quickly away from  
dusty locations.  
[26] How to Use  
Preparing the camera  
Setting the language, date and time  
Setting language, date and time  
When you turn on the camera for the first time or after you have initialized the  
functions, the setting screen for language, date and time will appear.  
1. Turn on the camera.  
The language setting screen will appear and then setting screen for date and  
time will appear.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Select your language, and then press  
.
3. Check that [Enter] is selected on the screen, then press  
wheel.  
on the control  
4. Select your desired geographic location, and then press  
.
5. Select a setting item using the up/down side of the control wheel or by turning  
the control wheel, then press in the center.  
6. Set [Daylight Savings], [Date/Time], and [Date Format] using the  
up/down/left/right sides, then press in the center.  
Midnight is indicated as 12:00 AM, and noon as 12:00 PM.  
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to set other items, then select [Enter] and press  
the center.  
in  
To cancel the date and time setting procedure, press the MENU button.  
Note  
This camera does not have a function for inserting the date on images. You can  
insert the date on images and then save and print them using PlayMemories  
Home (For Windows only).  
If the date and time setting is cancelled halfway, the setting screen for the date  
and time appears every time you turn on the camera.  
[27] How to Use  
Confirming the operation method  
Confirming the operation method  
Using the control wheel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
You can select setting items by turning or pressing the top/bottom/right/left side of  
the control wheel. Your selection is determined when you press  
of the control wheel.  
on the center  
The DISP (Display Setting),  
/
(Drive Mode), and ISO (ISO) functions are  
assigned to the top/left/right side of the control wheel. In addition, you can assign  
selected functions to the left/right/bottom side of the control wheel or to  
center, and to the rotation of the control wheel.  
in the  
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left  
side of the control wheel or by turning the control wheel.  
[28] How to Use  
Confirming the operation method  
Confirming the operation method  
Using MENU items  
In this section, you learn how to change settings related to all camera operations  
and execute camera functions including shooting, playback, and operation  
methods.  
1. Press MENU button to display the Menu screen.  
2. Select the desired MENU item using the up/down/left/right side of the control  
wheel or by turning the control wheel, and then press  
control wheel.  
in the center of the  
The display may move directly from step 1 to step 3 depending on the [Tile  
Menu] setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Select the desired setting item by pressing the up/down/left/right side on the  
control wheel or by turning the control wheel, and then press  
center of the control wheel.  
on the  
Select an icon at the top of the screen and press the left/right side of the  
control wheel to move to another MENU item.  
4. Select the desired setting value, and press  
to confirm.  
[29] How to Use  
Confirming the operation method  
Confirming the operation method  
Using the Fn (Function) button  
You can register frequently used functions to the Fn (function) button and recall  
them while shooting. Up to 12 frequently used functions can be registered to the  
Fn (Function) button.  
1. Press the DISP button, and then press the Fn (Function) button in a screen  
mode other than [For viewfinder].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Select a function to be registered by pressing the up/down/left/right side of  
the control wheel.  
3. Turn the front dial to select the desired setting.  
Some functions can be fine-tuned using the rear dial.  
Performing settings on the dedicated screen  
Select the desired function in step 2, then press  
on the center of the control  
wheel. The dedicated setting screen for the function appears. Follow the  
operating guide (A) to perform the settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[30] How to Use  
Confirming the operation method  
Confirming the operation method  
Using the "Quick Navi"  
You can change the settings directly using the Quick Navi screen when using the  
viewfinder. The displayed contents and their position are just a guideline, and  
may differ from the actual display.  
1. MENU  
(Custom Settings) [DISP Button] [Monitor] [For  
viewfinder] [Enter].  
2. Press the DISP (Display Setting) button on the control wheel repeatedly until  
the screen is set to [For viewfinder].  
3. Press Fn (Function) button to switch the screen to Quick Navi screen.  
In Auto Mode or Scene Selection mode  
In P/A/S/M/Sweep Panorama mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Select the desired function by pressing the up/down/left/right side of the  
control wheel.  
5. Turn the front dial to select the desired setting.  
Some setting values can be finely adjusted by turning the rear dial.  
Performing settings on the dedicated screen  
Select the desired function in step 4, then press  
on the center of the control  
wheel. The dedicated setting screen for the function appears. Follow the  
operating guide (A) to perform the settings.  
Note  
Gray items on the Quick Navi screen are not available.  
When using [Creative Style] or [Picture Profile], some of the setup tasks can be  
accomplished only on a designated screen.  
[31] How to Use  
Shooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
Shooting still images  
Shoots still images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Set the shooting mode to  
(Auto Mode).  
Turn the mode dial while pressing the mode dial lock release button in the  
center of the mode dial.  
2. Adjust the monitor angle, and hold the camera. Or look through the  
viewfinder and hold the camera.  
3. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.  
When the image is in focus, the indicator (  
or  
) lights up.  
4. Press the shutter button fully down.  
Focus indicator  
lights:  
Image is in the focus.  
flashes:  
The focusing has failed.  
lights:  
Image is in the focus. The focused position will change to suit the motion of the  
subject.  
lights:  
The focusing is in progress.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hint  
When the product cannot focus automatically, the focus indicator flashes and  
the beep does not sound. Either recompose the shot or change the focus  
setting. When [Continuous AF] is set, the beep does not sound when focus is  
achieved.  
Focusing may be difficult in the following situations:  
It is dark and the subject is distant.  
The contrast of the subject is poor.  
The subject is seen through glass.  
The subject is moving quickly.  
There is reflective light or shiny surfaces.  
There is a flashing light.  
The subject is backlit.  
Continuously repetitive pattern, such as the appearance of a building.  
The subjects in the focus area have different focal distances.  
[32] How to Use  
Shooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
Shooting movies  
You can record movies by pressing the MOVIE (Movie) button.  
1. Press the MOVIE button to start recording.  
2. Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.  
Hint  
You can assign the start/stop movie recording function to a preferred key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MENU→  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] set the function to  
the preferred key.  
When you want to specify the area to be focused on, set the area using [Focus  
Area].  
To keep the focus on a face, arrange the composition so that the focus area  
frame and face detection frame overlap, or set the [Focus Area] to [Wide].  
You can focus quickly while shooting movies by pressing the shutter button  
halfway down.(The sound of auto focus operation may be recorded in some  
cases.)  
Note  
To adjust the shutter speed and aperture value to the desired settings, set the  
shooting mode to (Movie).  
If you use a function such as zoom while shooting a movie, the noise of the lens  
operating will be recorded. The sound of the MOVIE button operating may also  
be recorded when you press the MOVIE button to stop recording.  
For the continuous shooting time of a movie recording, refer to “Recordable  
time of movies.” When movie recording is finished, you can restart recording by  
pressing the MOVIE button again. Recording may stop to protect the product,  
depending on the temperature of the product or the battery.  
When shooting, the sound of the shoulder strap hooks (triangular hook) could  
be recorded, depending on the situation used.  
When the mode dial is set to  
(Movie) or when shooting movies, you cannot  
select [Lock-on AF] for [Focus Area].  
[33] How to Use  
Shooting  
Selecting a shooting mode  
List of mode dial functions  
You can select the desired shooting mode by turning the mode dial.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turn the mode dial while pressing the mode dial lock release button in the  
center of the mode dial.  
Available functions  
(Auto Mode):  
Allows you to shoot still images of any subject under any condition with good  
results by setting the values determined appropriate by the product.  
(Program Auto):  
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter  
speed and the aperture value (F value)). Also you can select various settings  
using the menu.  
(Aperture Priority):  
Allows you to adjust the aperture and shoot when you want to blur the  
background, etc.  
(Shutter Priority):  
Allows you to shoot fast-moving subjects etc., by manually adjusting the shutter  
speed.  
(Manual Exposure):  
Allows you to shoot still images with the desired exposure by adjusting the  
exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value (F value)).  
1/2 (Memory recall):  
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or numeric settings  
registered in advance.  
(Movie):  
Allows you to change the setting for movie recording.  
(Sweep Panorama):  
Allows you to shoot a panoramic image by compositing the images.  
SCN (Scene Selection):  
Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene.  
[34] How to Use  
Shooting  
Selecting a shooting mode  
Intelligent Auto  
The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Set the mode dial to  
(Auto Mode).  
2. MENU (Camera Settings) [Auto Mode] [Intelligent Auto].  
When [Mode Dial Guide] is set to [On], you can select the desired settings  
after you have changed the position of the mode dial.  
3. Point the camera to the subject.  
When the camera recognized the scene, the icon for the recognized scene  
appears on the screen.  
4. Adjust the focus and shoot the image.  
Note  
The product will not recognize the scene when you shoot images with zoom  
functions other than optical zoom.  
The product may not properly recognize the scene under certain shooting  
conditions.  
[35] How to Use  
Shooting  
Selecting a shooting mode  
Superior Auto  
The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition. This mode takes clear  
images of dark or backlit scenes.  
For low-lit or backlit scenes, if necessary the camera may shoot multiple images  
and create a composite image, etc., to record higher quality images than in  
Intelligent Auto mode.  
1. Set the mode dial to  
(Auto Mode).  
2. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Auto Mode] [Superior Auto].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When [Mode Dial Guide] is set to [On], you can select the desired settings  
after you have changed the position of the mode dial.  
3. Point the camera to the subject.  
When the camera recognizes a scene, scene recognition icon appears on  
the screen. If necessary, appropriate shooting function for the recognized  
scene and the number of times the shutter is released also appear.  
4. Adjust the focus and shoot the image.  
When the camera shoots multiple images, it automatically chooses and  
saves the appropriate image. You can also save all the images by setting the  
[S. Auto Img. Extract.].  
Note  
When the product is used to create composite images, the recording process  
takes longer than usual.  
The product will not recognize the scene when you use zoom functions other  
than optical zoom.  
The product may not properly recognize a scene under some shooting  
conditions.  
When [  
Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the product cannot  
create a composite image.  
[36] How to Use  
Shooting  
Selecting a shooting mode  
About Scene Recognition  
Scene Recognition operates in [Intelligent Auto] mode and [Superior Auto] mode.  
This function allows the product to automatically recognize the shooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
conditions and shoot the image.  
Scene Recognition:  
When the product recognizes certain scenes, the following icons and guides are  
displayed on the first line:  
(Portrait)  
(Infant)  
(Night Portrait)  
(Night Scene)  
(Backlight Portrait)  
(Backlight)  
(Landscape)  
(Macro)  
(Spotlight)  
(Low Light)  
(Night Scene using a tripod)  
(Hand-held Twilight)  
Image processing:  
[Cont. Shooting], [Slow Sync.], [Auto HDR], [Daylight Sync.], [Slow Shutter],  
[Hand-held Twilight]  
Note  
When [Smile/Face Detect.] is set to [Off], the [Portrait], [Backlight Portrait],  
[Night Portrait] and [Infant] scenes are not recognized.  
[37] How to Use  
Shooting  
Selecting a shooting mode  
The advantages of automatic shooting  
This camera is equipped with the following three automatic shooting modes:  
[Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], and [Program Auto].  
(Intelligent Auto):  
Allows you to shoot with automatic scene recognition.  
(Superior Auto):  
Allows you to shoot with automatic scene recognition. This mode takes clear  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
images of dark or backlit scenes.  
P (Program Auto):  
Allows you to adjust various shooting settings such as white balance or ISO  
value, etc.  
Aperture value and shutter speed are automatically set by the camera.  
Hint  
In [Program Auto] mode, you can change the combination of shutter speed and  
aperture value while maintaining the correct exposure by turning the control  
wheel. This function is called "Program Shift" (P*).  
Note  
In [Superior Auto] mode, the recording process takes longer, since the product  
creates a composite image. In this case, the shutter sound is heard multiple  
times, but only one image is recorded.  
For [Intelligent Auto] and [Superior Auto] mode, most of the functions are set  
automatically, and you cannot adjust the settings on your own.  
[38] How to Use  
Shooting  
Selecting a shooting mode  
Program Auto  
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter  
speed and the aperture value).  
You can set shooting functions such as [ISO].  
1. Set the mode dial to P (Program Auto).  
2. Set the shooting functions to your desired settings.  
3. Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.  
Program Shift  
You can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination by rotating  
the front/rear dial, without changing the appropriate exposure that is set by this  
product. This function is available when you do not use the flash.  
“P” on the screen changes to “P*” when you turn the front/rear dial.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To cancel program shift, set the shooting mode to other than [Program Auto], or  
turn off the camera.  
Note  
According to the brightness of the environment, the program shift may not be  
used.  
Set the shooting mode to another one than “P” or turn off the power to cancel  
the setting you made.  
When the brightness changes, the aperture (F value) and shutter speed also  
change while maintaining the shift amount.  
[39] How to Use  
Shooting  
Selecting a shooting mode  
Sweep Panorama  
Allows you to create a single panoramic image from multiple images shot while  
panning the camera.  
1. Set the mode dial to  
(Sweep Panorama).  
2. Point the camera at the subject.  
3. While pressing the shutter button halfway down, aim the camera at one end  
of the desired panoramic composition.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(A) This part will not be shot.  
4. Press the shutter button fully down.  
5. Pan the camera to the end of the guide in the direction of the arrow on the  
monitor.  
(B) Guidance bar  
Note  
If the entire angle of the panoramic shot is not achieved within the set time, a  
gray area occurs in the composite image. If this happens, move the product  
faster to record the full panoramic image.  
When [Wide] is selected for [Panorama: Size], the entire angle of the panoramic  
shot may not be achieved within the given time. If this happens, try shooting  
after changing [Panorama: Size] to [Standard].  
Since several images are stitched together, the stitched part may not be  
recorded smoothly in some cases.  
The images may be blurred in dark scenes.  
When a light source such as a fluorescent light flickers, the brightness and color  
of a stitched image may not be consistent.  
When the whole angle of panoramic shooting and the AE/AF locked angle are  
very different in brightness and focus, the shooting may not be successful. If  
this happens, change AE/AF locked angle and shoot again.  
The following situations are not suited for shooting Sweep Panorama:  
Moving subjects.  
Subjects that are too close to the product.  
Subjects with continuously similar patterns, such as the sky, beach, or a lawn.  
Subjects with constant change such as waves or water falls.  
Subjects with brightness widely different from its surroundings such as the sun or a  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
light bulb.  
The Sweep Panorama shooting may be interrupted in the following situations.  
When the camera is panned too fast or too slow.  
The subject is too blurry.  
Hint  
Turn the front dial while the shooting screen is displayed to select the shooting  
direction.  
[40] How to Use  
Shooting  
Selecting a shooting mode  
Scene Selection  
Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene.  
1. Set the mode dial to SCN (Scene Selection).  
2. Turn the front dial to select the desired setting.  
When [Mode Dial Guide] is set to [On], you can select the desired settings  
after you have changed the position of the mode dial.  
Menu item details  
Portrait:  
Blurs background and sharpens the subject. Accentuates the skin tones softly.  
Sports Action:  
Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is  
standing still. The product shoots images continuously while the shutter button is  
pressed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Macro:  
Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.  
Landscape:  
Shoots the entire range of a scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors.  
Sunset:  
Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.  
Night Scene:  
Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere.  
Hand-held Twilight:  
Shoots night scenes with less noise and blur without using a tripod. A burst of  
shots are taken, and image processing is applied to reduce subject blur, camera-  
shake, and noise.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Night Portrait:  
Shoots night scene portraits using the flash.  
Anti Motion Blur:  
Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur.  
The product shoots burst images and combines them to create the image,  
reducing subject blur and noise.  
Note  
Under the following settings, the shutter speed is slower, so use of a tripod is  
recommended to prevent the image from blurring:  
[Night Scene]  
[Night Portrait]  
In the [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] mode, the shutter clicks 4 times  
and an image is recorded.  
If you select [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] with [RAW] or [RAW &  
JPEG], the image quality becomes [Fine] temporarily.  
Reducing blur is less effective even in [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur]  
when shooting the following subjects:  
Subjects with erratic movement.  
Subjects that are too close to the product.  
Subjects with continuously similar patterns, such as the sky, a beach, or a lawn.  
Subjects with constant change such as waves or water falls.  
In the case of [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur], block noise may occur  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
when using a light source that flickers, such as fluorescent lighting.  
The minimum distance that you can come close to a subject does not change  
even if you select [Macro]. For the minimum in-focus range, refer to the  
minimum distance of the lens attached to the product.  
Hint  
To change the scene, rotate the front dial on the shooting screen and select a  
new scene.  
[41] How to Use  
Shooting  
Selecting a shooting mode  
Shutter Priority  
You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by adjusting  
the shutter speed, for example, at the instant of the movement with high speed  
shutter, or as a trailing image with low speed shutter. The shutter speed can be  
changed while recording movies.  
1. Set the mode dial to S (Shutter Priority).  
2. Select the desired value by turning the front/rear dial.  
3. Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.  
The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.  
Note  
If proper exposure cannot be obtained after setup, the aperture value on the  
shooting screen blinks. Although you can shoot as it is, resetting is  
recommended.  
Use a tripod to prevent blurring when you use a slow shutter speed.  
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in shutter speed priority  
mode.  
When the shutter speed is 1 second(s) or longer, noise reduction will be done  
after shooting for the same amount of time that the shutter was open.  
However, you cannot shoot any more while noise reduction is in progress.  
The brightness of the image on the monitor may differ from the actual image  
being shot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hint  
When a faster shutter speed is used, moving subjects, such as a running  
person, cars, or sea spray come out as if they are frozen in their movements.  
When a slower shutter speed is used, a trailing image of the movement of the  
subject is captured to create a more natural and dynamic image.  
[42] How to Use  
Shooting  
Selecting a shooting mode  
Aperture Priority  
You can shoot by adjusting the aperture and changing the range in focus, or by  
defocusing the background. The aperture value can be changed while recording  
movies.  
1. Set the mode dial to A (Aperture Priority).  
2. Select the desired value by turning the front/rear dial.  
Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond  
the subject are blurred.  
Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in  
focus.  
3. Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.  
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.  
Note  
If proper exposure cannot be obtained after setup, the shutter speed on the  
shooting screen blinks. Although you can shoot as it is, resetting is  
recommended.  
The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image  
being shot.  
Hint  
Smaller F-value (opening the aperture) narrows the range that is in focus. This  
allows you to put the subject in sharp focus and blur objects in front of and  
beyond the subject (depth of field becomes shallower). Larger F-value  
(narrowing down the aperture) widens the range that is in focus. This allows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
you to shoot the depth of the scenery (depth of field becomes deeper).  
[43] How to Use  
Shooting  
Selecting a shooting mode  
Manual Exposure  
You can shoot with the desired exposure setting by adjusting both the shutter  
speed and aperture. The shutter speed and the aperture value can be changed  
while recording movies.  
1. Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).  
2. Select the desired aperture value by turning the front dial.  
Select the desired shutter speed by turning the rear dial.  
When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO], use MM (Metered Manual) to  
check the exposure value.  
Toward +: Images become brighter.  
Toward -: Images become darker.  
0: Appropriate exposure analyzed by the product  
3. Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.  
Note  
When [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO], the ISO value automatically changes to  
achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed  
you have set. If the aperture value and shutter speed you have set are not  
suitable for appropriate exposure, the ISO value indicator will blink.  
The Metered Manual indicator does not appear when [ISO] is set to [ISO  
AUTO].  
When the amount of ambient light exceeds the metering range of the Metered  
Manual, the Metered Manual indicator flashes.  
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in manual exposure mode.  
The brightness of the image on the monitor may differ from the actual image  
being shot.  
Hint  
By setting the AF/MF/AEL switch lever to AEL and rotating the front/rear dial  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
while pressing the AEL button, you can change the shutter speed and aperture  
(F-value) combination without changing the set exposure value. (Manual shift)  
[44] How to Use  
Shooting  
Selecting a shooting mode  
BULB  
You can shoot a trailing image of the movement of a subject with long exposure.  
BULB is suitable for shooting trails of light, such as fireworks.  
1. Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).  
2. Turn the rear dial clockwise until [BULB] is indicated.  
3. Select the aperture value (F value) using the front dial.  
4. Press the shutter button halfway down to adjust the focus.  
5. Press and hold the shutter button for the duration of the shooting.  
As long as the shutter button is pressed, the shutter remains open.  
Note  
Since the shutter speed becomes slow and the camera-shake tends to occur  
more easily, it is recommended that you use a tripod.  
The longer the exposure time, the more noise will be visible on the image.  
After shooting, noise reduction will be done for the same amount of time that  
the shutter was open. However, you cannot shoot any more while noise  
reduction is in progress.  
You cannot set the shutter speed to [BULB] in the following situations:  
When the [Smile Shutter] function is activated.  
When the [Auto HDR] function is activated.  
When [Picture Effect] is set to [HDR Painting] or [Rich-tone Mono.].  
When the [Multi Frame NR] function is activated.  
When the [Drive Mode] function is set to the following modes:  
[Cont. Shooting]  
[Cont. Bracket]  
[Self-timer(Cont)]  
[
Silent Shooting]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you use the above functions when the shutter speed is set to [BULB], the  
shutter speed is temporarily set to 30 seconds.  
Hint  
Images shot in [BULB] mode tend to be blurry. We recommend that you use a  
tripod or a remote commander (sold separately) that has a shutter button lock  
function.  
[45] How to Use  
Shooting  
Selecting a shooting mode  
Memory recall  
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings  
registered in advance.  
1. Set the mode dial to 1 or 2 (Memory recall).  
2. Press  
on the center of the control wheel.  
You can also recall registered modes or settings by selecting MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Memory recall].  
Hint  
To recall the registered settings from the memory card, select MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Memory recall].  
Note  
Register shooting settings in advance by [Memory].  
If you set [Memory recall] after completing the shooting settings, the registered  
settings are given priority and the original settings may become invalid. Check  
the indicators on the screen before shooting.  
[46] How to Use  
Shooting  
Selecting a shooting mode  
Movie  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
You can adjust the shutter speed or aperture value to your desired settings for  
recording movies. You can also check the image angle before shooting.  
1. Set the mode dial to  
(Movie).  
2. MENU (Camera Settings) [Movie] desired setting.  
When [Mode Dial Guide] is set to [On], you can select the desired settings  
after you have changed the position of the mode dial.  
3. Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.  
Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.  
Menu item details  
Program Auto:  
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter  
speed and the aperture value).  
Aperture Priority:  
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.  
Shutter Priority:  
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.  
Manual Exposure:  
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the  
aperture value) manually.  
[47] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Using the zoom  
Zoom  
When a zoom lens is mounted, you can enlarge images by turning the zoom ring  
of the lens.  
1. Turn the zoom ring of the zoom lens to enlarge subjects.  
When a Power zoom lens is mounted, move the zoom lever of the zoom  
lens or the zoom ring to enlarge subjects.  
About other [Zoom] functions than the optical zoom  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When you set [Zoom Setting] to something other than [Optical zoom only], you  
can use other zoom functions than the optical zoom.  
When a Power zoom lens is mounted:  
If the zoom range of the optical zoom is exceeded when you operate the zoom  
lever or zoom ring, the camera automatically switches over to another zoom  
function than the optical zoom.  
When a lens other than a Power zoom lens is mounted:  
MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Zoom] desired value.  
[48] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Using the zoom  
The zoom features available with this product  
The zoom feature of the product provides a higher magnification zoom by  
combining various zoom features. The icon displayed on the screen changes,  
according to the selected zoom feature.  
1. Optical zoom range  
Zoom images in the zoom range of a lens.  
When a Power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom bar of the optical zoom  
range is displayed.  
When a lens other than a Power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom bar of  
optical zoom range is not displayed.  
2. Smart Zoom range (  
)
Zoom images without causing the original quality to deteriorate by partially  
cropping an image (only when the image size is [M] or [S]).  
3. Clear Image Zoom range (  
)
Zoom images using an image process with less deterioration. Set [Zoom  
Setting] to [On:ClearImage Zoom] or [On:Digital Zoom] first.  
4. Digital Zoom range (  
)
You can magnify images using an image process. When you select  
[On:Digital Zoom] for [Zoom Setting], you can use this zoom function.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
The default setting for the [Zoom Setting] is [Optical zoom only].  
The default setting for [ Image Size] is [L]. To use the smart zoom change [  
Image Size] to [M] or [S].  
Zoom functions other than the optical zoom are not available when shooting in  
the following situations:  
Shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].  
[
[
Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG]  
Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].  
You cannot use the Smart Zoom function with movies.  
When a power zoom lens is mounted, you cannot use [Zoom] under MENU. If  
you enlarge image past the optical zoom range, the product automatically  
switches to another [Zoom] function than the optical zoom.  
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, [Metering Mode]  
fixed to [Multi].  
When using a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the following  
functions are not available.  
[Smile/Face Detect.]  
Lock-on AF  
[
Auto Obj. Framing]  
To use another zoom function than the optical zoom for movies, assign [Zoom]  
to the desired button using [Custom Key Settings].  
[49] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Using the zoom  
Zoom Setting  
You can select the zoom setting of the product.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Zoom Setting] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Optical zoom only:  
Optical zoom is activated. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set [  
Image Size] to [M] or [S].  
On:ClearImage Zoom:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Even if the zoom range of the optical zoom is exceeded, the product magnifies  
images within the range in which image quality does not deteriorate significantly.  
On:Digital Zoom:  
When the zoom range of the [  
Clear Image Zoom] is exceeded, the product  
magnifies images to the largest scale. However, the image quality will deteriorate.  
Note  
Set [Optical zoom only] if you want to magnify images within the range in which  
image quality does not deteriorate.  
[50] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Using the zoom  
About zoom scale  
The zoom scale that is used in combination with the zoom of the lens changes  
according to the selected image size.  
When [  
Aspect Ratio] is [3:2]  
When shooting full-size images  
[Zoom Setting] : [Optical zoom only] (including smart zoom)  
[
Image Size] : L -, M 1.5×, S 2×  
[Zoom Setting] : [On:ClearImage Zoom]  
Image Size] : L 2×, M 3.1×, S 4×  
[Zoom Setting] : [On:Digital Zoom]  
Image Size] : L 4×, M 6.2×, S 8×  
[
[
When shooting APS-C size images  
[Zoom Setting] : [Optical zoom only] (including smart zoom)  
[
Image Size] : L -, M 1.3×, S 2×  
[Zoom Setting] : [On:ClearImage Zoom]  
Image Size] : L 2×, M 2.6×, S 4×  
[Zoom Setting] : [On:Digital Zoom]  
Image Size] : L 4×, M 5.2×, S 8×  
[
[
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[51] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Using the zoom  
Zoom Ring Rotate  
Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction.  
Available only with power zoom lenses that support this function.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Zoom Ring Rotate] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Left(W)/Right(T):  
Assigns zoom out (W) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-in (T) function to  
right-handed rotation.  
Right(W)/Left(T):  
Assigns zoom in (T) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-out (W) function to  
right-handed rotation.  
Note  
This function is available only with a power zoom lens whose operation  
direction is variable.  
[52] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Using the flash  
Using flash (sold separately)  
In dark environments, use the flash to light up the subject while shooting and to  
prevent camera-shake. When shooting against the sun, use the flash to lighten  
the image of the backlit subject.  
1. Attach the flash to the product (sold separately).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Press the shutter button fully down.  
Note  
You cannot use the flash when recording movies.  
While charging the flash,  
flashes. After charging is completed, the flashing  
icon will light up.  
Before attaching/removing an accessory such as a flash to/from the Multi  
Interface Shoe, turn off the product first.  
When attaching an accessory, insert it fully to the Multi Interface Shoe and  
screw tightly. Also, make sure that the accessory is fixed securely to the  
product.  
Do not use a commercially available flash with high-voltage synchro terminals  
or with reverse polarity.  
When shooting with the flash and the zoom is set to W, the shadow of the lens  
may appear on the screen, depending on the shooting conditions. If this  
happens, shoot away from the subject or set the zoom to T and shoot with the  
flash again.  
The corners of a recorded image may be shaded, depending on the lens.  
[53] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Using the flash  
Flash Mode  
You can set the flash mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Flash Mode] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Flash Off:  
The flash does not operate.  
Autoflash:  
The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.  
Fill-flash:  
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.  
Slow Sync.:  
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you  
to shoot a clear image of both the subject and the background by slowing the  
shutter speed.  
Rear Sync.:  
The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the  
shutter. Rear sync shooting allows you to shoot a natural image of the trail of a  
moving subject such as a moving car or a walking person.  
Wireless:  
When using a wireless flash, the shading effect provides a more 3D appearance to  
a subject than when using an attached flash.  
This mode is effective when you attach a remote control-compatible external flash  
(sold separately) to the product, and shoot with a wireless flash (sold separately),  
placed away from the product.  
Note  
The default setting depends on the shooting mode.  
Available flash mode depends on the shooting mode.  
[54] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Using the flash  
Flash Comp.  
Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV.  
Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light only. Exposure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
compensation changes the amount of flash light along with the change of the  
shutter speed and aperture.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Flash Comp.] desired setting.  
Selecting higher values (+ side) makes the flash level higher, and lower  
values (– side) makes the flash level lower.  
Note  
[Flash Comp.] does not work when the shooting mode is set to the following  
modes:  
[Intelligent Auto]  
[Superior Auto]  
[Sweep Panorama]  
[Scene Selection]  
The higher flash effect may not be visible due to the limited amount of flash light  
available, if the subject is outside the maximum range of the flash. If the  
subject is very close, the lower flash effect may not be visible.  
[55] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Using the flash  
FEL Lock  
The flash level is automatically adjusted so that the subject gets the optimum  
exposure during normal flash shooting. You can also set the flash exposure in  
advance.  
FEL: Flash Exposure Level  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] desired button  
Select [FEL Lock toggle] to register the function.  
2. Center the subject on which FEL is to be locked, and adjust the focus.  
3. Press the button to which [FEL Lock toggle] is registered, and set the flash  
amount.  
A pre-flash flashes.  
The (FEL lock) icon lights up.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Adjust the composition and shoot the image.  
When you want to release the FEL lock, press the button to which [FEL  
Lock toggle] is registered again.  
Flashes that support FEL lock  
HVL-F60M, HVL-F43M and HVL-F32M can be used as clip-ons, off-camera  
connected by a cable, and for wireless flash shooting (controller/remote).  
HVL-F20M can be used as a clip-on, off-camera connected with a cable, and  
for wireless flash shooting (controller).  
Note  
The FEL lock cannot be set when a flash is not attached.  
If a flash that does not support the FEL lock is attached, an error message is  
displayed.  
When both AE and FEL lock are fixed,  
lights up.  
Hint  
By setting [FEL Lock hold], you can hold the setting while the button is pressed  
down. Also, by setting [FEL Lock/AEL hold] and [FEL Lock/AEL tggle.], you  
can shoot images with the AE locked in the following situations.  
When [Flash Mode] is set to [Flash Off] or [Autoflash].  
When the flash cannot go off.  
When using an external flash that is set to manual flash mode.  
[56] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting a screen display mode  
Switching the screen display (Shooting)  
You can change the display contents on the screen.  
1. Press the DISP (Display Setting) button.  
Each time you press the DISP button, the recording information display  
changes.  
Graphic Display  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Display All Info.  
No Disp. Info.  
Histogram  
Level  
For viewfinder*  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*
[For viewfinder] is displayed only on the screen.  
Some display modes are not available in the default settings.  
To change the display modes, press MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [DISP  
Button] and change the setting.  
Note  
Histogram is not displayed during panorama shooting.  
In movie mode, [For viewfinder] cannot be displayed.  
Hint  
You can select different settings for both the viewfinder and the monitor. Look  
through the viewfinder to set the display settings for the viewfinder.  
To hide the grid lines displayed during still image shooting, select MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Grid Line] [Off].  
To hide the marker displayed during movie recording, select MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [  
Marker Display] [Off].  
[57] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting a screen display mode  
DISP Button (Finder)  
Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected for the viewfinder  
using  
(Display Setting) in shooting mode.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [DISP Button] [Finder] desired  
setting [Enter].  
The items marked with  
are available.  
Menu item details  
Graphic Display:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Shows basic shooting information. Graphically shows the shutter speed and  
aperture value.  
Display All Info.:  
Shows recording information.  
No Disp. Info.:  
Does not show recording information.  
Histogram:  
Displays the luminance distribution graphically.  
Level:  
Indicates whether the product is level in both the horizontal and front-back  
directions. When the product is level in both directions, the indicator turns to  
green.  
[58] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting a screen display mode  
DISP Button (Monitor)  
Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected for the monitor  
using  
(Display Setting) in shooting mode.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [DISP Button] [Monitor] desired  
setting [Enter].  
The items marked with  
are available.  
Menu item details  
Graphic Display:  
Shows basic shooting information. Graphically shows the shutter speed and  
aperture value.  
Display All Info.:  
Shows recording information.  
No Disp. Info.:  
Does not show recording information.  
Histogram:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Displays the luminance distribution graphically.  
Level:  
Indicates whether the product is level in both the horizontal and front-back  
directions. When the product is level in both directions, the indicator turns to  
green.  
For viewfinder:  
Displays information suited for shooting with the viewfinder.  
[59] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting a screen display mode  
TC/UB Disp. Switch  
Allows you to display the time code (TC) and user bit (UB) of a movie by pressing  
the key to which [TC/UB Disp. Switch] function has been assigned.  
1. MENU→  
(Custom Settings)[Custom Key Settings]assign the [TC/UB  
Disp. Switch] function to the desired key.  
2. Press the key to which [TC/UB Disp. Switch] has been assigned.  
Each time you press the key, the monitor display will switch from the  
movie recording time counter time code (TC) user bit (UB), in that  
order.  
Note  
When the monitor is tilted while in shooting mode, such as during self-portrait  
shooting, TC/UB information is not displayed. In playback mode, TC/UB  
information is displayed even if the monitor is tilted.  
[60] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting still image size/image quality  
Image Size (still image)  
The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
printed on large-format paper. The smaller the image size, the more images can  
be recorded.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [  
Image Size] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Image size when [  
L: 42M  
Aspect Ratio] is 3:2  
7952×5304 pixels  
M: 18M  
5168×3448 pixels  
S: 11M  
3984×2656 pixels  
Image size when [  
L: 36M  
Aspect Ratio] is 16:9  
7952×4472 pixels  
M: 15M  
5168×2912 pixels  
S: 8.9M  
3984×2240 pixels  
Image size when [APS-C/Super 35mm] is [On]  
Image size when [  
L: 18M  
Aspect Ratio] is 3:2  
5168×3448 pixels  
M: 11M  
3984×2656 pixels  
S: 4.5M  
2592×1728 pixels  
Image size when [  
L: 15M  
Aspect Ratio] is 16:9  
5168×2912 pixels  
M: 8.9M  
3984×2240 pixels  
S: 3.8M  
2592×1456 pixels  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note  
When [  
Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the image size for RAW  
images corresponds to [L].  
[61] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting still image size/image quality  
Aspect Ratio (still image)  
Sets the aspect ratio of still images.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [  
Aspect Ratio] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
3:2:  
Suitable for standard prints.  
16:9:  
For viewing on a high-definition TV.  
[62] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting still image size/image quality  
Quality (still image)  
Selects the compression format of still images.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [  
Quality] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
RAW:  
File format: RAW (Records using the RAW compression format.)  
Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this format to  
process images on a computer for professional purposes.  
The image size is fixed to the maximum size. The image size is not displayed  
on the screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
RAW & JPEG:  
File format: RAW (Records using the RAW compression format.) + JPEG  
A RAW image and a JPEG image are created at the same time. This is suitable  
when you need 2 image files, a JPEG for viewing, and a RAW for editing.  
The JPEG image quality is set to [Fine].  
Extra fine:  
File format: JPEG  
The image is compressed in the JPEG format and recorded using a higher quality  
than with [Fine].  
Fine:  
File format: JPEG  
The image is compressed in the JPEG format when recorded.  
Standard:  
File format: JPEG  
The image is compressed in the JPEG format when recorded. Since the  
compression rate of [Standard] is higher than that of [Fine], the file size of  
[Standard] is smaller than that of [Fine]. This will allow more files to be recorded  
on 1 memory card, but the image quality will be lower.  
About RAW images  
To open a RAW image file recorded with this camera, the software Image Data  
Converter is needed. With Image Data Converter, you can open a RAW image  
file, then convert it into a popular image format such as JPEG or TIFF, or  
readjust the white balance, saturation or contrast of the image.  
You cannot apply [Auto HDR] or [Picture Effect] functions with RAW images.  
RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits per pixel.  
However, resolution is limited to 12 bits in the following shooting modes:  
[
Long Exposure NR]  
[BULB]  
Continuous shooting (including continuous shooting in [Superior Auto] mode.)  
[
Silent Shooting]  
Note  
If you do not intend to edit the images on your computer, we recommend that  
you record in JPEG format.  
You cannot add DPOF (print order) registration marks to RAW images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[63] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting still image size/image quality  
Panorama: Size  
Sets the image size when shooting panoramic images. The image size varies  
depending on the [Panorama: Direction] setting.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Panorama: Size] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
When [Panorama: Direction] is [Up] or [Down]  
Standard: 3872×2160  
Wide: 5536×2160  
When [Panorama: Direction] is [Left] or [Right]  
Standard: 8192×1856  
Wide: 12416×1856  
[64] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting still image size/image quality  
Panorama: Direction  
Sets the direction to pan the camera when shooting panoramic images.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Panorama: Direction] desired  
setting.  
Menu item details  
Right:  
Pan the camera from the left to the right.  
Left:  
Pan the camera from the right to the left.  
Up:  
Pan the camera from the bottom to the top.  
Down:  
Pan the camera from the top to the bottom.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[65] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Focus Mode  
Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Focus Mode] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
(Single-shot AF):  
The product locks the focus when the focus adjustment is achieved. Use [Single-  
shot AF] when the subject is motionless.  
(Automatic AF):  
[Single-shot AF] and [Continuous AF] are switched according to the movement of  
the subject. When the shutter button is pressed halfway down, the product locks  
the focus when it determines that the subject is motionless, or continues to focus  
when the subject is in motion.  
During continuous shooting, the product automatically shoots with Continuous AF  
from the second shot.  
(Continuous AF):  
The product continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held  
halfway down. Use this when the subject is in motion.  
(DMF):  
Allows you to use manual focus and auto focus in combination.  
(Manual Focus):  
Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using  
auto focus, use manual focus.  
Note  
If the subject is too close, the image may show any dust or fingerprints on the  
lens. Wipe the lens with a soft cloth, etc.  
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the beep does not sound when  
focus is achieved.  
[Automatic AF] is available only when you are using a lens that supports phase  
detection AF.  
When [Focus Area] is [Wide] or [Zone], the focus range finder frame may  
change after you achieve focus using [Automatic AF] mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Depending on the lens you use, the angle of view may change little by little  
during focusing. This change in angle of view may be more evident when the  
focus mode is set to [Continuous AF] (AF-C) or [Automatic AF] (including  
[Sports Action] in Scene Selection and when the subject is moving when  
shooting in [Automatic AF] (AF-A) mode). This will not affect the actual  
recorded images. Consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service  
facility on compatible lenses.  
Hint  
If you shoot movies when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF] or [DMF], the  
[Focus Mode] will automatically change to  
continue to focus.  
(Continuous AF) and then  
[66] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Focus Area  
Selects the focusing area. Use this function when it is difficult to get the proper  
focus in auto focus mode. The setting applies to both still images and movies.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Focus Area] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Wide:  
Focuses automatically on a subject in all ranges of the image.  
When you press the shutter button halfway down in still image shooting mode, a  
green frame is displayed around the area that is in focus.  
Zone:  
Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus. A zone consists of nine focus  
areas, and the product automatically selects a focus area on which to focus.  
Center:  
Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image. When used  
together with the AF lock function, you can compose the image you want.  
Flexible Spot:  
Allows you to move the AF range frame to the desired point on the screen and  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
focus on an extremely small subject in a narrow area.  
On the Flexible Spot shooting screen, you can change the size of the AF range  
finder frame by rotating the control wheel.  
Expand Flexible Spot:  
If the product fails to focus on the single selected point, it uses the focus points  
around the flexible spot as the second priority area to achieve focus.  
Lock-on AF:  
When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the product tracks the  
subject within the selected autofocus area. Point the cursor to [Lock-on AF] on the  
[Focus Area] setting screen, then select the desired tracking start area using the  
left/right sides of the control wheel. You can move the tracking start area to a  
desired point by designating the area to be the flexible spot or expand flexible  
spot.  
On the Flexible Spot shooting screen, you can change the size of the AF range  
finder frame by rotating the control wheel.  
Hint  
You can move the [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], or [Zone] area  
quickly through the following methods:  
By pressing the key to which [Focus Settings] has been assigned, and then turning the  
front/rear dial or pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel. [Focus  
Settings] is assigned to the C2 key in the default settings.  
Note  
When [Focus Mode] is [Continuous AF] and [Focus Area] is [Wide] or [Zone],  
the focus range finder frame may change after the focus is achieved.  
When the mode dial is set to  
(Movie) or when shooting movies, you cannot  
select [Lock-on AF] for [Focus Area].  
You can select [Lock-on AF] only when the focus mode is set to [Continuous  
AF].  
A dotted square may appear around the whole screen in the clear image zoom,  
digital zoom, or smart zoom range in order to focus using the entire frame.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[67] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Phase detection AF  
When there are phase detection AF points within the auto focus area, the product  
uses the combined autofocus of the phase detection AF and contrast AF.  
Note  
When the F-value is set to F9.0 or more, you cannot use the phase detection  
AF. Only contrast AF is available.  
Phase detection AF is available only when an applicable lens is attached. If you  
use a lens that does not support focal plane phase detection AF, you cannot  
use [Automatic AF], [  
AF Track Sens] or [  
AF drive speed].  
Also, even if you use a previously purchased applicable lens, the phase  
detection AF might not function unless you update the lens.  
[68] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Center Lock-on AF  
When you press the center button, the camera detects the subject positioned in  
the center of the screen and continues to track the subject.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Center Lock-on AF] [On]  
2. Align the target frame (A) over the subject and press  
control wheel.  
in the center of the  
Press  
again to stop tracking.  
If the camera loses track of the subject, it can detect when the subject  
reappears on the monitor and resume tracking.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.  
Note  
[Center Lock-on AF] may not function very well in the following situations:  
The subject is moving too quickly.  
The subject is too small, or too large.  
The contrast between the subject and the background is poor.  
It is dark.  
The ambient light changes.  
Lock-on AF does not work in the following situations:  
In [Sweep Panorama] mode  
When [Scene Selection] is set to [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur]  
When shooting in Manual Focus mode  
When using the digital zoom  
The camera may not be able to resume tracking for a while after it loses the  
track of the subject.  
[69] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Focus-lock  
Shoots images with the focus locked on the desired subject in auto focus mode.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Focus Mode] [Single-shot AF] or  
[Automatic AF].  
2. Place the subject within the AF area and press the shutter button halfway  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
down.  
The focus is locked.  
3. Keep pressing the shutter button halfway down, and place the subject back in  
the original position to re-compose the shot.  
4. Press the shutter button down fully to take the picture.  
Note  
When the subject is moving, you cannot lock the focus even if [Focus Mode]  
has been set to [Automatic AF].  
[70] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Manual Focus  
When it is difficult to get the proper focus in autofocus mode, you can adjust the  
focus manually. The setting applies to both still images and movies.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Focus Mode] [Manual Focus].  
2. Rotate the focus ring to achieve sharp focus.  
When you rotate the focus ring, the focus distance is displayed on the  
screen.  
The focus distance may not be displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold  
separately) is attached.  
3. Press the shutter button fully down to take the picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
When you use the viewfinder, adjust the diopter level to obtain the correct focus  
on the viewfinder.  
[71] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Direct manual focus (DMF)  
You can make fine adjustments manually after the focus is locked.  
You can quickly focus on a subject rather than using the manual focus from the  
beginning. This is convenient in cases such as macro shooting.  
1. MENU   
(Camera Settings) [Focus Mode] [DMF].  
2. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus automatically.  
3. Keep the shutter button halfway down, rotate the focusing ring to achieve a  
sharper focus.  
When you rotate the focus ring, the focus distance is displayed on the  
screen.  
The focus distance may not be displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold  
separately) is attached.  
4. Press the shutter button fully down to shoot an image.  
[72] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MF Assist (still image)  
Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing easier.  
This works in Manual Focus or Direct Manual Focus shooting.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [  
MF Assist] [On].  
2. Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.  
The image is enlarged. You can magnify images further by pressing  
on the center of the control wheel.  
Note  
You cannot use [  
MF Assist] when shooting movies.  
[
MF Assist] is available only when E-mount lens is attached.  
Hint  
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU  
(Custom Settings) [Focus Magnif. Time].  
[73] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Focus Magnifier  
You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Focus Magnifier].  
2. Press  
on the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select  
the position you want to enlarge using up/down/left/right side of the control  
wheel.  
You can change the magnifier scaling in two steps by pressing  
center, and close the focus magnifier mode and return to the normal  
shooting display by pressing three times.  
in the  
3. Confirm the focus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.  
Hint  
When focusing manually, you can adjust the focus while an image is magnified.  
Press the  
an image.  
(Delete) button to bring the magnified position into the center of  
The [Focus Magnifier] function will be released when the shutter button is  
pressed halfway.  
You can record images while an image is enlarged, but the product records a  
full-display image.  
The [Focus Magnifier] function will be released after shooting.  
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU  
(Custom Settings) [Focus Magnif. Time].  
[74] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Focus Magnif. Time  
Set the duration for which an image is to be magnified using the [  
or [Focus Magnifier] function.  
MF Assist]  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Focus Magnif. Time] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
2 Sec:  
Magnifies the images for 2 seconds.  
5 Sec:  
Magnifies the images for 5 seconds.  
No Limit:  
Magnifies the images until you press the shutter button.  
[75] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Peaking Level  
Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges using a specific color in Manual Focus or  
Direct Manual Focus shooting. This function allows you to confirm the focus  
easily. The setting applies to both still images and movies.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Peaking Level] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
High:  
Sets the peaking level to high.  
Mid:  
Sets the peaking level to middle.  
Low:  
Sets the peaking level to low.  
Off:  
Does not use the peaking function.  
Note  
Since the product recognizes sharp areas as in focus, the effect of peaking  
differs, depending on the subject and lens.  
The outline of in-focus ranges is not enhanced when the product is connected  
using an HDMI cable.  
[76] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Peaking Color  
Sets the color used for the peaking function in Manual Focus or Direct Manual  
Focus shooting. The setting applies to both still images and movies.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Peaking Color] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Red:  
Enhances outlines in red.  
Yellow:  
Enhances outlines in yellow.  
White:  
Enhances outlines in white.  
[77] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Pre-AF (still image)  
The product automatically adjusts focus before you press the shutter button  
halfway down.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [  
Pre-AF] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
Adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.  
Off:  
Does not adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.  
Note  
[
Pre-AF] is available only when an E-mount lens is mounted.  
[78] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Eye-Start AF (still image)  
Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through an Electronic  
Viewfinder.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [  
Eye-Start AF] desired setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item details  
On:  
Auto focusing starts when you look through the Electronic Viewfinder.  
Off:  
Auto focusing does not start when you look through the Electronic Viewfinder.  
Hint  
[
Eye-Start AF] is available when an A-mount lens and a Mount Adaptor  
(LA-EA2, LA-EA4) (sold separately) are attached.  
[79] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
AF/MF control  
You can easily switch the focusing mode from auto to manual and vice versa while  
shooting without changing your holding position. The setting applies to both still  
images and movies.  
1. Switch the AF/MF/AEL switch lever to the AF/MF position, then press the  
AF/MF button.  
During auto focus:  
Temporarily switches the focusing mode to manual. Adjust the focus by turning  
the focus ring (A) while holding down the AF/MF button.  
During manual focus:  
Temporarily switches the focusing mode to auto while the AF/MF button is held  
down, and locks the focus.  
Hint  
If you select [AF/MF Ctrl Toggle] in [AF/MF Button] under [Custom Key  
Settings], the focusing mode remains switched even if you remove your finger  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
from the button.  
[80] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
AF Illuminator (still image)  
The AF illuminator supplies fill light to focus more easily on a subject in dark  
surroundings. The red AF illuminator allows the product to focus easily when the  
shutter button is pressed halfway, until the focus is locked.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [  
AF Illuminator] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Auto:  
Uses the AF illuminator.  
Off:  
Does not use the AF illuminator.  
Note  
You cannot use [  
AF Illuminator] in the following situations:  
In movie mode  
In [Sweep Panorama] mode  
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is  
moving (when the focus indicator or lights up)  
When [Scene Selection] is set to the following modes:  
[Landscape]  
[Sports Action]  
[Night Scene]  
When a Mount Adaptor is attached.  
The AF illuminator emits a very bright light. Although there is no health hazard,  
do not look directly into the AF illuminator at close range.  
[81] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
AF Micro Adj.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Allows you to adjust and register an autofocused position for each lens, when  
using an A-mount lens with the Mount Adaptor LA-EA2 or LA-EA4 (sold  
separately).  
1. Select MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [AF Micro Adj.].  
2. Select [AF Adjustment Set.] [On].  
3. [amount] desired value.  
You can select a value between 20 and +20. The larger the value you  
select, the farther the autofocused position will be from the product. The  
smaller the value you select, the closer the autofocused position will be to  
the product.  
Note  
It is recommended that you adjust the position under actual shooting conditions.  
When you attach a lens for which you have already registered a value, the  
registered value appears on the screen. [±0] appears for lenses for which a  
value has not yet been registered.  
If [] is displayed as the value, then a total of 30 lenses have been registered  
and no new lens can be registered. To register a new lens, attach a lens for  
which the registration can be erased, and set its value to [±0], or reset the  
values of all the lenses using [Clear].  
The [AF Micro Adj.] supports Sony, Minolta, or Konica-Minolta lenses. If you  
perform [AF Micro Adj.] with lenses other than the supported lenses, the  
registered settings for the supported lenses may be affected. Do not perform  
[AF Micro Adj.] with an unsupported lens.  
You cannot set [AF Micro Adj.] individually for a Sony, Minolta, and Konica-  
Minolta lens of the same specification.  
[82] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Disp. cont. AF area  
You can set whether or not to display the area that is in focus when [Focus Area]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
is set to [Wide] or [Zone], in [Continuous AF] mode.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Disp. cont. AF area] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
Displays the focus area that is in focus.  
Off:  
Does not display the focus area that is in focus.  
Note  
When [Focus Area] is [Center], [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot], the  
frames in the focus area that is in focus turn green, regardless of the [Disp.  
cont. AF area] settings.  
When an A-mount lens and a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA1/LA-EA3) (sold  
separately) are mounted on the camera and [  
AF System] is set to [Phase  
Detection AF], [Disp. cont. AF area] is always turned on regardless of the  
[Focus Area] settings.  
[83] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Focus Settings  
Sets up the focus functions. The setting applies to both still images and movies.  
1. MENU (Camera Settings) [Focus Settings].  
2. Perform settings using the front/rear dial or control wheel.  
When the focus mode is set to [Autofocus]/[DMF]  
Front dial: Moves the focus area frame up/down.  
Rear dial: Moves the focus area frame right/left.  
Control wheel: Selects the focus area.  
When the focus mode is set to [Manual Focus]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
You can set the area to be magnified when focusing manually.  
Front dial: Moves the area to be magnified up/down.  
Rear dial: Moves the area to be magnified right/left.  
Control wheel: Moves the area to be magnified up/down.  
Note  
You can move the focus area when [Focus Area] is set to the following:  
[Zone]  
[Flexible Spot]  
[Expand Flexible Spot]  
[Lock-on AF: Zone]  
[Lock-on AF: Flexible Spot]  
[Lock-on AF:Expand Flexible Spot]  
[84] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
AF w/ shutter (still image)  
Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway  
down. Select [Off] to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [  
AF w/ shutter] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
The auto focus operates when you press the shutter button halfway down.  
Off:  
The auto focus does not operate even if you press the shutter button halfway  
down.  
Hint  
When [  
AF w/ shutter] is set to [Off], you can still use the [AF On] function.  
[85] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AF On  
You can focus using any button instead of pressing the shutter button halfway  
down. The settings for [Focus Mode] will be applied.  
1. Select the desired key and assign the [AF On] function to it using MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings].  
2. Press the key to which you have assigned the [AF On] function while auto-  
focus shooting.  
[86] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Eye AF  
The camera focuses on the subject's eyes while you keep the button pressed.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] assign the [Eye  
AF] function to the desired button.  
2. Point the camera at a person's face, and press the button to which you have  
assigned the [Eye AF] function.  
3. Press the shutter button while pressing the button.  
Hint  
When the camera focuses on the eyes, a detection frame is displayed over the  
eyes. If the focus mode is set to [Single-shot AF], the frame will disappear after  
a period of time.  
Note  
The camera may not be able to focus on the eyes depending on the  
circumstances, such as when no eyes can be detected within the auto focus  
area. In such cases, the camera detects a face and focuses on the face.  
If the camera cannot detect a person’s face, you cannot use [Eye AF].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Depending on the circumstances, you cannot use [Eye AF], such as when  
[Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus], etc.  
[Eye AF] may not function in the following situations:  
When the person is wearing sunglasses.  
When the front hair covers the person’s eyes.  
In low-light or back-lit conditions.  
When the eyes are closed.  
When the person is in the shade.  
When the person is out of focus.  
When the person is moving too much.  
If the person is moving too much, the detection frame may not display correctly  
over their eyes.  
[87] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Phase Detect. Area  
Sets whether or not to display the Phase Detection AF area.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Phase Detect. Area] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
Displays the Phase Detection AF area.  
Off:  
Does not display the Phase Detection AF area.  
Note  
When the F-value is F9.0 or more, Phase Detection AF cannot be used. Only  
Contrast AF is available.  
Phase Detection AF is available only with compatible lenses. If an incompatible  
lens is attached, you will be unable to use Phase Detection AF. Phase  
Detection AF may not operate even with some compatible lens, such as lenses  
purchased in the past that have not been updated. For details on compatible  
lenses, visit the Sony web site in your area, or consult your Sony dealer or  
local authorized Sony service facility.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When shooting images in APS-C size, the Phase Detection AF area will not be  
displayed.  
When recording movies, the Phase Detection AF area will not be displayed.  
[88] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
AF drive speed (movie)  
You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [  
AF drive speed] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Fast:  
Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes,  
such as sports.  
Normal:  
Sets the AF drive speed to normal.  
Slow:  
Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly  
when the subject to be focused is changed. This mode is useful for shooting  
impressive images.  
[89] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
AF Track Sens (movie)  
You can set the duration for AF tracking in movie mode.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [  
AF Track Sens] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
High:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sets the AF Track Duration to high. This mode is useful when recording movies  
when the subject is moving quickly.  
Normal:  
Sets the AF Track Duration to normal. This mode is useful when you want to keep  
the focus on a certain subject when there are some obstacles in front of the  
subject or in crowded places.  
[90] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Measuring the exact distance to the subject  
The  
mark shows the location of the image sensor*. When you measure the  
exact distance between the product and the subject, refer to the position of the  
horizontal line.  
The distance from the lens contact surface to the image sensor is about 18 mm  
(23/32 in.).  
*
The image sensor is the part that converts the light source to a digital signal.  
Note  
If the subject is closer than the minimum shooting distance of the lens, the  
focus cannot be confirmed. Make sure you put enough distance between the  
subject and the product.  
[91] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Priority Set in AF-S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when [Focus  
Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF], [DMF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is  
remaining still.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Priority Set in AF-S] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
AF:  
Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.  
Release:  
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is  
out of focus.  
Balanced Emphasis:  
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.  
[92] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
Priority Set in AF-C  
Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when  
[Continuous AF] is activated and the subject is in motion.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Priority Set in AF-C] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
AF:  
Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.  
Release:  
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is  
out of focus.  
Balanced Emphasis:  
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[93] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the focus  
AF System (still image)  
Sets the focus detection system (Phase Detection AF/Contrast AF) when you  
attach an A-mount lens using an LA-EA1/LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [  
AF System] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Phase Detection AF:  
Focuses with Phase Detection AF. The focusing speed is faster than in [Contrast  
AF] mode, but focusing is limited to within the phase detection focus area.  
Contrast AF:  
Always focuses with Contrast AF. You can focus anywhere on the monitor, but the  
focusing speed is slower than in [Phase Detection AF] mode.  
Note  
When [  
[Focus Mode] is unavailable.  
When [ AF System] is set to [Phase Detection AF], [Zone], [Expand Flexible  
Spot] and [Lock-on AF] under [Focus Area] are unavailable.  
When [ AF System] is set to [Phase Detection AF], even if [Priority Set in  
AF-S] is set to [Balanced Emphasis], the camera will temporarily switch to [AF].  
AF System] is set to [Contrast AF],  
(Continuous AF) under  
When [  
AF System] is set to [Phase Detection AF], [Eye AF] is unavailable.  
[94] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the exposure  
Exposure Comp.  
You can adjust the exposure under MENU when the exposure compensation dial  
is set to “0.” Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can make  
the entire image brighter or darker if you adjust [Exposure Comp.] to the plus side  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
or minus side, respectively (exposure compensation). Normally, exposure is set  
automatically (auto exposure).  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Exposure Comp.] desired setting.  
You can adjust the exposure in a range of –5.0EV to +5.0EV when the  
exposure compensation dial is set to “0.”  
Note  
You can adjust the exposure in a range of –2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.  
If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use  
the flash, you may not be able to get a satisfactory effect.  
When the exposure compensation dial is set to other than “0,” settings for the  
exposure compensation dial will be prioritized. For example, if you set  
[Exposure Comp.] to +3.0EV, but the exposure compensation dial is set to  
+2.0EV, the “+2.0EV” setting will be prioritized.  
When you set the exposure compensation dial to “0” from a setting other than  
“0,” the exposure value switches to “0” even if the exposure has been set to  
other settings.  
When you use [Manual Exposure], you can compensate for the exposure only  
when [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].  
[95] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the exposure  
Exposure compensation dial  
Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can make the entire  
image brighter or darker if you adjust [Exposure Comp.] to the plus side or minus  
side, respectively (exposure compensation). Normally, exposure is set  
automatically (auto exposure).  
1. Turn the exposure compensation dial.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
You can adjust the exposure in a range of 2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.  
If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use  
the flash, you may not be able to get a satisfactory effect.  
When you use [Manual Exposure], you can compensate for the exposure only  
when [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].  
[96] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the exposure  
Metering Mode  
Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure for  
determining the exposure.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Metering Mode] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Multi:  
Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and  
determines the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).  
Center:  
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the  
central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).  
Spot:  
Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This function is useful when the  
subject is backlit or when there is strong contrast between the subject and the  
background.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
The setting is fixed to [Multi] in the following shooting modes:  
[Intelligent Auto]  
[Superior Auto]  
[Scene Selection]  
Zoom functions other than optical zoom  
[97] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the exposure  
AE lock  
When the contrast between the subject and background is high, such as when  
shooting a backlit subject or a subject near a window, meter the light at a spot  
where the subject appears to have the appropriate brightness and lock the  
exposure before shooting. To reduce the brightness of the subject, meter the light  
at a spot brighter than the subject and lock the exposure of the entire screen. To  
make the subject brighter, meter the light at a spot darker than the subject and  
lock the exposure of the entire screen.  
1. Adjust the focus on the spot at which the exposure is adjusted.  
2. Switch the AF/MF/AEL switch lever to the AEL position, then press the AEL  
button.  
The exposure is locked, and  
(AE lock) lights up.  
3. Keep pressing the AEL button and focus on the subject again, then shoot the  
picture.  
Keep holding the AEL button down while taking a shot if you want to  
continue shooting with the fixed exposure. Release the button to reset the  
exposure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hint  
If you select the [AEL toggle] function in  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key  
Settings], you can lock the exposure without holding down the AEL button.  
[98] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the exposure  
AEL w/ shutter (still image)  
Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.  
This function is useful when you want to adjust focus and exposure separately.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [  
AEL w/ shutter] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Auto:  
Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the  
shutter button halfway down when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF].  
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF], and the product determines that the  
subject is moving, or you shoot burst images, the fixed exposure is cancelled.  
On:  
Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.  
Off:  
Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use  
this mode when you want to adjust focus and exposure separately.  
The product keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in [Cont. Shooting]  
mode.  
Note  
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] and [  
AEL w/ shutter] is [Off]  
or [Auto], the aperture is fixed at the moment you press the shutter button  
halfway. If the brightness changes drastically during continuous shooting,  
release your finger from the shutter button once, then press the shutter button  
halfway down again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the [  
settings.  
AEL w/ shutter]  
[99] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the exposure  
Exp.comp.set  
Sets whether to apply the exposure compensation value to control both flash light  
and ambient light, or just ambient light.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Exp.comp.set] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Ambient&flash:  
Applies the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient  
light.  
Ambient only:  
Applies the exposure compensation value to control ambient light only.  
[100] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the exposure  
Zebra  
The zebra pattern will appear over part of an image if the brightness level of that  
part meets the IRE level that you set. Use this zebra pattern as a guide to adjust  
the brightness.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Zebra] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Off:  
Does not display the zebra pattern.  
70/75/80/85/90/95/100/100+:  
Adjusts the brightness level.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Note  
The zebra pattern is not displayed during HDMI connection.  
[101] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the exposure  
Exposure Set. Guide  
You can set whether to display a guide when you change the exposure.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Exposure Set. Guide] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Off:  
Does not display the guide.  
On:  
Displays the guide.  
[102] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the exposure  
Exposure step  
You can set the setting range for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure  
compensation values.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Exposure step] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
0.3EV/0.5EV  
Note  
Even if you set [Exposure step] to [0.5EV], the exposure value adjusted using  
the exposure compensation dial changes in steps of 0.3EV.  
[103] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the exposure  
Dial Ev Comp  
You can adjust the exposure using the front dial or rear dial when the exposure  
compensation dial is set to “0.”  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Dial Ev Comp] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Off:  
Does not enable exposure compensation with the front or rear dial.  
Front dial/ Rear dial:  
Enables exposure compensation with the front or rear dial.  
Note  
When the exposure compensation function is assigned to the front or rear dial,  
any function that had been assigned to that dial previously is re-assigned to  
another dial.  
When the exposure compensation dial is set to a position other than “0,” the  
settings of the exposure compensation dial will be prioritized. For example, if  
you set [Exposure Comp.] to +5.0EV, but the exposure compensation dial is  
set to +2.0EV, the “+2.0EV” setting will be prioritized.  
[104] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting the exposure  
Reset EV Comp.  
Sets whether to maintain the exposure value set using [Exposure Comp.] when  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
you turn off the power when the exposure compensation dial position is set to “0.”  
1. MENU (Custom Settings) [Reset EV Comp.] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Maintain:  
Maintains the settings of [Custom Settings].  
Reset:  
Resets the settings of [Exposure Comp.] to “0.”  
[105] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting a drive mode (Continuous  
shooting/Self-timer)  
Drive Mode  
You can set the drive mode, such as continuous or self-timer shooting.  
1. MENU →  
You can also set the drive mode by pressing  
of the control wheel.  
(Camera Settings) [Drive Mode] desired setting.  
/
(Drive Mode) button  
Menu item details  
Single Shooting:  
Shoots one still image. Normal shooting mode.  
Cont. Shooting:  
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.  
Self-timer:  
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have  
elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.  
Self-timer(Cont):  
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated  
number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.  
Cont. Bracket:  
Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees  
of brightness.  
Single Bracket:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degree of  
brightness.  
WB bracket:  
Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the  
selected settings for white balance, color temperature and color filter.  
DRO Bracket:  
Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.  
Note  
When the shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and [Sports Action] is  
selected, [Single Shooting] cannot be performed.  
[106] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting a drive mode (Continuous  
shooting/Self-timer)  
Cont. Shooting  
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.  
1. MENU(Camera Settings) [Drive Mode] [Cont. Shooting].  
2. Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.  
Menu Item Details  
Continuous Shooting: Hi:  
Continuous shooting speed is set at a maximum of about 5 images per second.  
Continuous Shooting: Lo:  
Continuous shooting speed is set at a maximum of about 2.5 images per second.  
Note  
Continuous shooting is unavailable in the following situations:  
The shooting mode has been set to [Sweep Panorama].  
The shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and a scene other than [Sports Action]  
is selected.  
The [Picture Effect] is set to [Soft Focus], [HDR Painting], [Rich-tone Mono.],  
[Miniature], [Watercolor], or [Illustration].  
The [DRO/Auto HDR] is set to [Auto HDR].  
[ISO] is set to [Multi Frame NR].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[Smile Shutter] is being used.  
Silent Shooting] is being used.  
[
Hint  
To hold the focus and exposure during burst, change the following settings.  
Set [Focus Mode] to [Continuous AF].  
Set [  
AEL w/ shutter] to [Off] or [Auto].  
[107] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting a drive mode (Continuous  
shooting/Self-timer)  
Self-timer  
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have  
elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Drive Mode] [Self-timer].  
2. Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.  
Menu item details  
Self-timer: 10 Sec:  
Sets the 10-second delay self-timer.  
When you press the shutter button, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds,  
and the shutter operates after 10 seconds. To cancel the self-timer, press the  
shutter button again.  
Self-timer: 5 Sec:  
Sets the 5-second delay self-timer.  
When you press the shutter button, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds,  
and the shutter operates after 5 seconds. To cancel the self-timer, press the  
shutter button again.  
Self-timer: 2 Sec:  
Sets the 2-second delay self-timer. This reduces the camera-shake caused by  
pressing the shutter button.  
Hint  
Press the  
/
button of the control wheel and select  
(Single Shooting)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
to cancel the self-timer.  
To use the self-timer in bracket mode, select bracket mode under drive mode,  
then select MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Bracket Settings] →  
[Selftimer during Brkt].  
Note  
The self-timer is unavailable in the following situations:  
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].  
[Sports Action] in [Scene Selection]  
[Smile Shutter]  
[108] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting a drive mode (Continuous  
shooting/Self-timer)  
Self-timer(Cont)  
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated  
number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed. You can  
choose the best from multiple shots.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Drive Mode] [Self-timer(Cont)].  
2. Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.  
Menu item details  
Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.:  
Shoots three frames in succession 10 seconds after you press the shutter button.  
When you press the shutter button, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds,  
and the shutter operates after 10 seconds.  
Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 5 Img.:  
Shoots five frames in succession 10 seconds after you press the shutter button.  
When you press the shutter button, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds,  
and the shutter operates after 10 seconds.  
Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 3 Img.:  
Shoots three frames in succession 5 seconds after you press the shutter button.  
When you press the shutter button, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds,  
and the shutter operates after 5 seconds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 5 Img.:  
Shoots five frames in succession 5 seconds after you press the shutter button.  
When you press the shutter button, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds,  
and the shutter operates after 5 seconds.  
Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 3 Img.:  
Shoots three frames in succession 2 seconds after you press the shutter button.  
When you press the shutter button, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds,  
and the shutter operates after 2 seconds.  
Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 5 Img.:  
Shoots five frames in succession 2 seconds after you press the shutter button.  
When you press the shutter button, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds,  
and the shutter operates after 2 seconds.  
Hint  
Press the shutter button again to stop the self-timer countdown.  
Press the  
/
button of the control wheel and select  
(Single Shooting)  
to cancel the self-timer.  
[109] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting a drive mode (Continuous  
shooting/Self-timer)  
Cont. Bracket  
Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to  
darker and then to lighter. Press and hold down the shutter button until the  
bracket recording is completed.  
You can select an image that suits your intention, after recording.  
1. MENU→  
(Camera Settings) [Drive Mode] [Cont. Bracket].  
2. Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.  
Menu item details  
Cont. Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image:  
This setting shoots three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by  
plus or minus 0.3 EV.  
Cont. Bracket: 0.3EV 5 Image:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This setting shoots five images continuously with an exposure value shifted by  
plus or minus 0.3 EV.  
Cont. Bracket: 0.3EV 9 Image:  
This setting shoots nine images continuously with an exposure value shifted by  
plus or minus 0.3 EV.  
Cont. Bracket: 0.5EV 3 Image:  
This setting shoots three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by  
plus or minus 0.5 EV.  
Cont. Bracket: 0.5EV 5 Image:  
This setting shoots five images continuously with an exposure value shifted by  
plus or minus 0.5 EV.  
Cont. Bracket: 0.5EV 9 Image:  
This setting shoots nine images continuously with an exposure value shifted by  
plus or minus 0.5 EV.  
Cont. Bracket: 0.7EV 3 Image:  
This setting shoots three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by  
plus or minus 0.7 EV.  
Cont. Bracket: 0.7EV 5 Image:  
This setting shoots five images continuously with an exposure value shifted by  
plus or minus 0.7 EV.  
Cont. Bracket: 0.7EV 9 Image:  
This setting shoots nine images continuously with an exposure value shifted by  
plus or minus 0.7 EV.  
Cont. Bracket: 1.0EV 3 Image:  
This setting shoots three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by  
plus or minus 1.0 EV.  
Cont. Bracket: 1.0EV 5 Image:  
This setting shoots five images continuously with an exposure value shifted by  
plus or minus 1.0 EV.  
Cont. Bracket: 1.0EV 9 Image:  
This setting shoots nine images continuously with an exposure value shifted by  
plus or minus 1.0 EV.  
Cont. Bracket: 2.0EV 3 Image:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This setting shoots three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by  
plus or minus 2.0 EV.  
Cont. Bracket: 2.0EV 5 Image:  
This setting shoots five images continuously with an exposure value shifted by  
plus or minus 2.0 EV.  
Cont. Bracket: 3.0EV 3 Image:  
This setting shoots three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by  
plus or minus 3.0 EV.  
Cont. Bracket: 3.0EV 5 Image:  
This setting shoots five images continuously with an exposure value shifted by  
plus or minus 3.0 EV.  
Note  
The last shot is shown on the Auto Review.  
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is  
changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other than [ISO AUTO] is  
selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.  
When you adjust the exposure, the exposure is shifted based on the  
compensated value.  
Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following situations:  
The shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], [Scene Selection], or  
[Sweep Panorama].  
When the flash is used, the product performs flash bracket shooting, which  
shifts the amount of flash light even if [Cont. Bracket] is selected. Press the  
shutter button for each image.  
[110] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting a drive mode (Continuous  
shooting/Self-timer)  
Single Bracket  
Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to  
darker and then to lighter. Press the shutter button for each image. You can  
select an image that suits your purpose after recording.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Drive Mode] [Single Bracket].  
2. Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.  
Menu item details  
Single Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image:  
This setting shoots a total of three images in a row with an exposure value shifted  
by plus or minus 0.3 EV.  
Single Bracket: 0.3EV 5 Image:  
This setting shoots a total of five images in a row with an exposure value shifted  
by plus or minus 0.3 EV.  
Single Bracket: 0.3EV 9 Image:  
This setting shoots a total of nine images in a row with an exposure value shifted  
by plus or minus 0.3 EV.  
Single Bracket: 0.5EV 3 Image:  
This setting shoots a total of three images in a row with an exposure value shifted  
by plus or minus 0.5 EV.  
Single Bracket: 0.5EV 5 Image:  
This setting shoots a total of five images in a row with an exposure value shifted  
by plus or minus 0.5 EV.  
Single Bracket: 0.5EV 9 Image:  
This setting shoots a total of nine images in a row with an exposure value shifted  
by plus or minus 0.5 EV.  
Single Bracket: 0.7EV 3 Image:  
This setting shoots a total of three images in a row with an exposure value shifted  
by plus or minus 0.7 EV.  
Single Bracket: 0.7EV 5 Image:  
This setting shoots a total of five images in a row with an exposure value shifted  
by plus or minus 0.7 EV.  
Single Bracket: 0.7EV 9 Image:  
This setting shoots a total of nine images in a row with an exposure value shifted  
by plus or minus 0.7 EV.  
Single Bracket: 1.0EV 3 Image:  
This setting shoots a total of three images in a row with an exposure value shifted  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
by plus or minus 1.0 EV.  
Single Bracket: 1.0EV 5 Image:  
This setting shoots a total of five images in a row with an exposure value shifted  
by plus or minus 1.0 EV.  
Single Bracket: 1.0EV 9 Image:  
This setting shoots a total of nine images in a row with an exposure value shifted  
by plus or minus 1.0 EV.  
Single Bracket: 2.0EV 3 Image:  
This setting shoots a total of three images in a row with an exposure value shifted  
by plus or minus 2.0 EV.  
Single Bracket: 2.0EV 5 Image:  
This setting shoots a total of five images in a row with an exposure value shifted  
by plus or minus 2.0 EV.  
Single Bracket: 3.0EV 3 Image:  
This setting shoots a total of three images in a row with an exposure value shifted  
by plus or minus 3.0 EV.  
Single Bracket: 3.0EV 5 Image:  
This setting shoots a total of five images in a row with an exposure value shifted  
by plus or minus 3.0 EV.  
Note  
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is  
changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other than [ISO AUTO] is  
selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.  
When you adjust the exposure, the exposure is shifted based on the  
compensated value.  
Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following situations:  
The shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], [Scene Selection], or  
[Sweep Panorama].  
[111] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting a drive mode (Continuous  
shooting/Self-timer)  
WB bracket  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Shoots three images, each with different color tones according to the selected  
settings of white balance, color temperature and color filter.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Drive Mode] [WB bracket].  
2. Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.  
Menu item details  
White Balance Bracket: Lo:  
Records a series of three images with small changes in the white balance.  
White Balance Bracket: Hi:  
Records a series of three images with large changes in the white balance.  
Note  
The last shot is shown on the Auto Review.  
[112] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting a drive mode (Continuous  
shooting/Self-timer)  
DRO Bracket  
You can record a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range  
Optimizer value.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Drive Mode] [DRO Bracket].  
2. Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.  
Menu item details  
DRO Bracket: Lo:  
Records a series of three images with small changes in the D-Range Optimizer  
value.  
DRO Bracket: Hi:  
Records a series of three images with large changes in the D-Range Optimizer  
value.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
The last shot is shown on the Auto Review.  
[113] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting a drive mode (Continuous  
shooting/Self-timer)  
Settings for bracket shooting  
You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for  
exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Drive Mode] select bracket shooting  
mode.  
2. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Bracket Settings] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Selftimer during Brkt:  
Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number  
of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer.  
(OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)  
Bracket order:  
Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.  
(0→ → / 0)  
[114] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting a drive mode (Continuous  
shooting/Self-timer)  
Indicator during bracket shooting  
Viewfinder  
Ambient light* bracketing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 images shifted by 0.3EV steps  
Exposure compensation ±0.0 steps  
Monitor (Display All Info. or Histogram)  
Ambient light* bracketing  
3 images shifted by 0.3EV steps  
Exposure compensation ±0.0 steps  
Flash bracketing  
3 images shifted by 0.7EV steps  
Flash compensation -1.0 step  
Monitor (For viewfinder)  
Ambient light* bracketing  
3 images shifted by 0.3EV steps  
Exposure compensation ±0.0 steps  
Flash bracketing  
3 images shifted by 0.7EV steps  
Flash compensation -1.0 step  
*
Ambient light: A generic term for non-flash light including natural light, electric bulb and fluorescent  
lighting. Whereas the flash light blinks for a moment, ambient light is constant, so this kind of light  
is called "ambient light."  
Note  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
During bracket shooting, guides equal to the number of images to be shot are  
displayed over/under the bracket indicator.  
When you start bracket shooting, the guides will disappear one by one as the  
camera records images.  
[115] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting the ISO sensitivity  
ISO  
Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure  
index). The larger the number, the higher the sensitivity.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [ISO] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Multi Frame NR:  
Combines continuous shots to create an image with less noise. Select the desired  
ISO number from [ISO AUTO] or ISO 50 – 102400.  
ISO AUTO:  
Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.  
ISO 50 – ISO 102400:  
Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO  
sensitivity.  
Note  
[ISO AUTO] is selected when using the following functions:  
[Intelligent Auto]  
[Superior Auto]  
[Scene Selection]  
[Sweep Panorama]  
When [ISO] is set to a value lower than ISO 100, the range for recordable  
subject brightness (dynamic range) may decrease.  
The higher the ISO value, the more noise will appear on the images.  
When shooting movies, ISO values between ISO 100 and ISO 25600 are  
available.  
When you use [Multi Frame NR], it takes some time for the product to perform  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
the overlay processing of images.  
Hint  
You can change the automatically set ISO sensitivity range for the [ISO AUTO]  
mode. Select [ISO AUTO] and press the right side of the control wheel, and set  
the desired values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum]. The  
values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum] are also applied  
when shooting in [ISO AUTO] mode under [Multi Frame NR].  
[116] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting the ISO sensitivity  
ISO AUTO Min. SS  
If you select [ISO AUTO] or [ISO AUTO] under [Multi Frame NR] when the  
shooting mode is P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority), you can set the  
shutter speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing.  
This function is effective for shooting moving subjects. You can minimize subject  
blurring while also preventing camera shake.  
1. MENU→  
(Camera Settings)[ISO AUTO Min. SS]desired setting.  
Menu item details  
FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast):  
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than [Standard], so  
you can prevent camera shake and subject blurring.  
STD (Standard):  
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the  
lens.  
SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower):  
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than [Standard],  
so you can shoot images with less noise.  
1/800030":  
The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.  
Hint  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change  
between [Faster], [Fast], [Standard], [Slow], and [Slower] is 1 EV.  
Note  
If the exposure is insufficient even when the ISO sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO  
Maximum] in [ISO AUTO], in order to shoot with an appropriate exposure, the  
shutter speed will be slower than the speed set in [ISO AUTO Min. SS].  
In the following situations, the shutter speed may not function as set:  
When using the flash to shoot bright scenes. (The maximum shutter speed is limited  
to the flash-synching speed of 1/250 seconds.)  
When using the flash to shoot dark scenes with the [Flash Mode] set to [Fill-flash] or  
[Wireless]. (The minimum shutter speed is limited to the speed automatically  
determined by the camera.)  
[117] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting the ISO sensitivity  
Multi Frame NR  
The product automatically shoots multiple images continuously, combines them,  
reduces the noise, and records them as one image. The image recorded is one  
combined image.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [ISO] [Multi Frame NR].  
2. Press the right side of the control wheel to display the setting screen, then  
select a desired value using the top/bottom side of the control wheel.  
Note  
When [  
used.  
Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], this function cannot be  
The flash, [D-Range Opt.], and [Auto HDR] cannot be used.  
When [Picture Profile] is set to something other than [Off], you cannot set [Multi  
Frame NR].  
When [Picture Effect] is set to something other than [Off], you cannot set [Multi  
Frame NR].  
Hint  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
You can change the automatically set range of ISO sensitivity in the [ISO  
AUTO] mode under [Multi Frame NR]. Select [ISO AUTO] under [ISO] and  
press the right side of the control wheel, and set the desired values for [ISO  
AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum]. The values for [ISO AUTO  
Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum] are also applied when shooting in [ISO  
AUTO] mode under [Multi Frame NR].  
[118] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Correcting the brightness or contrast  
D-Range Opt. (DRO)  
By dividing the image into small areas, the product analyzes the contrast of light  
and shadow between the subject and the background, and creates an image with  
the optimal brightness and gradation.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [DRO/Auto HDR] [D-Range Opt.].  
2. Select the desired setting using the left/right side of the control wheel.  
Menu item details  
D-Range Optimizer: Auto:  
Corrects the brightness automatically.  
D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 D-Range Optimizer: Lv5:  
Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the  
optimization level from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5 (strong).  
Note  
[DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off] when the shooting mode is set to [Sweep  
Panorama], or when [Multi Frame NR] or [Picture Effect] is set to other than  
[Off].  
[DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off] when [Picture Profile] is set to something other  
than [Off].  
[DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off] when the following modes are selected in  
[Scene Selection].  
[Sunset]  
[Night Scene]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[Night Portrait]  
[Hand-held Twilight]  
[Anti Motion Blur]  
The setting is fixed to [D-Range Optimizer: Auto] when [Scene Selection]  
modes other than the above modes are selected.  
When shooting with [D-Range Opt.], the image may be noisy. Select the proper  
level by checking the recorded image, especially when you enhance the effect.  
[119] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Correcting the brightness or contrast  
Auto HDR  
Widens the range (gradation) so that you can record from bright parts to dark parts  
with correct brightness (HDR: High Dynamic Range). One image with proper  
exposure and one overlaid image are recorded.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [DRO/Auto HDR] [Auto HDR].  
2. Select the desired setting using the left/right side of the control wheel.  
Menu item details  
Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto:  
Corrects the exposure difference automatically.  
Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV:  
Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the  
optimal level between 1.0 EV (weak) and 6.0 EV (strong).  
For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be  
composed with the following exposure levels: 1.0 EV, correct exposure and +1.0  
EV.  
Note  
[Auto HDR] is not available for RAW images.  
[Auto HDR] is not available in the following shooting modes.  
[Intelligent Auto]  
[Superior Auto]  
[Sweep Panorama]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[Scene Selection]  
When [Multi Frame NR] is selected, you cannot select [Auto HDR].  
When [Picture Effect] is set to something other than [Off], you cannot select  
[Auto HDR].  
When [Picture Profile] is set to something other than [Off], you cannot set [Auto  
HDR].  
You cannot start the next shot until the capture process is completed after you  
shoot.  
You may not obtain the desired effect depending on the luminance difference of  
a subject and the shooting conditions.  
When the flash is used, this function has little effect.  
When the contrast of the scene is low or when product shake or subject blur  
occurs, you may not obtain good HDR images.  
will be displayed over  
the recorded image to inform you when the camera detects image blurring.  
Change the composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur, as  
needed.  
[120] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting color tones  
White Balance  
Adjusts the color tones according to the ambient light conditions. Use this feature  
when the color tones of the image did not come out as you expected, or when you  
want to change the color tones on purpose for photographic expression.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [White Balance] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Auto:  
The product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the color tones.  
Daylight:  
The color tones are adjusted for the daylight.  
Shade:  
The color tones are adjusted for shadiness.  
Cloudy:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The color temperature is adjusted for a cloudy sky.  
Incandescent:  
The color temperature is adjusted for places under an incandescent lamp, or  
under bright lighting, such as in a photo studio.  
Fluor.: Warm White:  
The color temperature is adjusted for warm white fluorescent lighting.  
Fluor.: Cool White:  
The color temperature is adjusted for white fluorescent lighting.  
Fluor.: Day White:  
The color temperature is adjusted for neutral white fluorescent lighting.  
Fluor.: Daylight:  
The color temperature is adjusted for daylight fluorescent lighting.  
Flash:  
The color temperature is adjusted for flash light.  
Underwater Auto:  
The color temperature is adjusted for underwater shooting.  
C.Temp./Filter:  
Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC  
(Color Compensation) filters for photography.  
Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3:  
Uses the white balance setting saved in [Custom Setup].  
Custom Setup:  
Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting  
environment.  
Select a memorized custom white balance number.  
Hint  
You can use the right side of the control wheel to display the fine adjustment  
screen and perform fine adjustments of the color tones as required.  
In [C.Temp./Filter], you can use the right button to display the color temperature  
setting screen and perform a setting. When you press the right button again,  
the fine adjustment screen appears to allow you perform fine adjustments as  
required.  
Note  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[White Balance] is fixed to [Auto] in the following situations:  
[Intelligent Auto]  
[Superior Auto]  
[Scene Selection]  
[121] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Adjusting color tones  
Capturing a basic white color in [Custom Setup] mode  
In a scene where the ambient light consists of multiple types of light sources, it is  
recommended to use the custom white balance in order to accurately reproduce  
the whiteness.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [White Balance] [Custom Setup].  
2. Hold the product so that the white area fully covers the AF area located in the  
center, and then press on the center of the control wheel.  
The calibrated values (Color Temperature and Color Filter) are displayed.  
3. Select a registration number using the right/left button.  
The monitor returns to the recording information display while retaining the  
memorized custom white balance setting.  
Note  
The message [Custom WB Error] indicates that the value is higher than the  
expected range, when the flash is used on a subject with too bright colors in  
the frame. If you register this value, the  
indicator turns orange on the  
recording information display. You can shoot at this point, but it is  
recommended that you set the white balance again to get a more accurate  
white balance value.  
[122] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting an effect mode  
Picture Effect  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Select the desired effect filter to achieve more impressive and artistic images.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Picture Effect] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Off:  
Disables the [Picture Effect] function.  
Toy Camera:  
Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.  
Pop Color:  
Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.  
Posterization:  
Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in  
black and white.  
Retro Photo:  
Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.  
Soft High-key:  
Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal,  
tender, soft.  
Partial Color:  
Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and  
white.  
High Contrast Mono.:  
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.  
Soft Focus:  
Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effect.  
HDR Painting:  
Creates the look of a painting, enhancing the colors and details.  
Rich-tone Mono.:  
Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of  
details.  
Miniature:  
Creates an image which enhances the subject vividly, with the background  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
defocused considerably. This effect may often be found in pictures of miniature  
models.  
Watercolor:  
Creates an image with ink bleed and blurring effects as if painted using  
watercolors.  
Illustration:  
Creates an illustration-like image by emphasizing the outlines.  
Hint  
You can perform detailed settings for the following [Picture Effect] modes using  
the left/right side of the control wheel.  
[Toy Camera]  
[Posterization]  
[Partial Color]  
[Soft Focus]  
[HDR Painting]  
[Miniature]  
[Illustration]  
Note  
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, setting the zoom  
scale larger makes [Toy Camera] less effective.  
When [Partial Color] is selected, images may not retain the selected color,  
depending on the subject or shooting conditions.  
You cannot check the following effects on the shooting screen, because the  
product processes the image after the shot. Also, you cannot shoot another  
image until image processing is finished. You cannot use these effects with  
movies.  
[Soft Focus]  
[HDR Painting]  
[Rich-tone Mono.]  
[Miniature]  
[Watercolor]  
[Illustration]  
In the case of [HDR Painting] and [Rich-tone Mono.], the shutter is released  
three times for one shot. Be careful about the following:  
Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.  
Do not change the composition before shooting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the contrast of the scene is low or when significant camera-shake or  
subject blur has occurred, you may not be able to obtain good HDR images. If  
the product detects such a situation,  
/
appear on the recorded image  
to inform you of this situation. If necessary, change the composition or  
otherwise adjust the settings, be careful of blurring, and shoot again.  
[Picture Effect] cannot be set when the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent  
Auto], [Superior Auto], [Scene Selection] or [Sweep Panorama].  
[Picture Effect] cannot be set when [  
JPEG].  
Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW &  
[123] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Selecting an effect mode  
Creative Style  
Allows you to select the desired image processing. You can adjust exposure  
(shutter speed and aperture) as you like with [Creative Style], unlike with [Scene  
Selection] where the product adjusts the exposure.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Creative Style] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Standard:  
For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.  
Vivid:  
The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful  
scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.  
Neutral:  
The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones.  
This is also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.  
Clear:  
For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for  
capturing radiant light.  
Deep:  
For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid  
presence of the subject.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Light:  
For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a  
refreshingly light ambience.  
Portrait:  
For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.  
Landscape:  
The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and  
crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more.  
Sunset:  
For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.  
Night Scene:  
The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.  
Autumn leaves:  
For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing  
leaves.  
Black & White:  
For shooting images in black and white monotone.  
Sepia:  
For shooting images in sepia monotone.  
Registering preferred settings (Style Box):  
Select the six style box (the boxes with numbers on the left side (  
)) to  
register preferred settings. Then select the desired settings using the right button.  
You can call up the same style with slightly different settings.  
To set [Contrast], [Saturation] and [Sharpness]  
[Contrast], [Saturation] and [Sharpness] can be adjusted for each [Style Box] item.  
Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel, then  
set the value using the top/bottom side of the control wheel.  
Contrast:  
The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is  
accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.  
Saturation:  
The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is  
selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sharpness:  
Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are  
accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are  
softened.  
Note  
[Standard] is selected when using the following functions:  
[Intelligent Auto]  
[Superior Auto]  
[Scene Selection]  
[Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].  
[Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].  
When [Creative Style] is set to [Black & White] or [Sepia], [Saturation] cannot  
be adjusted.  
[124] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Recording movies  
Movie recording formats  
The following movie recording formats are available with this camera.  
What is XAVC S?  
Records high-definition movies such as 4K by converting them to MP4 movies  
using the MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 codec. MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 is capable of  
compressing images at higher efficiency. You can record high-quality images  
while reducing the amount of data.  
XAVC S/AVCHD recording format  
XAVC S 4K:  
Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps or approx. 60 Mbps  
Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160).  
XAVC S HD:  
Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps  
Records a more vivid movie compared to AVCHD with increased amounts of  
information.  
AVCHD:  
Bit-rate: Approx. 28 Mbps (Maximum), Approx. 24 Mbps (Maximum) or Approx. 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Mbps (Average)  
The AVCHD format has a high degree of compatibility with storage devices other  
than computers.  
Bit rate is the amount of the data processed within a given length of time.  
[125] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Recording movies  
File Format (movie)  
Selects the movie file format.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [  
File Format] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
XAVC S 4K:  
Records high-definition movies in XAVC S 4K. This format supports a higher bit  
rate.  
Audio: LPCM  
In order to record movies with [  
File Format] set to [XAVC S 4K], the  
following kind of memory card is needed:  
SDXC memory card with a capacity of 64 GB or more (SD Speed Class 10 (  
))  
UHS-I-compatible SDXC memory card with a capacity of 64 GB or more (UHS Speed  
Class 1 (  
When recording in 100 Mbps or more, an SDXC memory card with a capacity of 64  
GB or more (UHS Speed Class 3 ( ))  
) or faster)  
[HDMI Info. Display] is temporarily set to [Off] when [  
[XAVC S 4K].  
File Format] is set to  
Images will not appear on the monitor when you record movies while the  
camera is connected to an HDMI device with [  
4K].  
File Format] set to [XAVC S  
[Smile/Face Detect.] and [Center Lock-on AF] are temporarily set to [Off] when  
the camera is connected to an HDMI device with [  
[XAVC S 4K].  
File Format] set to  
[Smile/Face Detect.], [Center Lock-on AF] and [  
REC Control] are  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
temporarily set to [Off] when [  
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [Dual  
Video REC] is set to [On]. Even if the camera is connected to an HDMI device,  
images will not be displayed on that device while movie recording is in  
progress.  
When [  
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [APS-C/Super 35mm] can be set  
to [Off] or [On].  
XAVC S HD:  
Records high-definition movies in XAVC S HD. This format supports a higher bit  
rate.  
Audio: LPCM  
In order to record movies with [  
File Format] set to [XAVC S HD], the  
following kind of memory card is needed:  
SDXC memory card with a capacity of 64 GB or more (SD Speed Class 10 (  
))  
UHS-I compatible SDXC memory card with a capacity of 64 GB or more (UHS Speed  
Class 1 (  
When recording in 100 Mbps or more, an SDXC memory card with a capacity of 64  
GB or more (UHS Speed Class 3 ( ))  
) or faster)  
AVCHD:  
Records HD movies in AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-  
definition TV.  
Audio: Dolby Digital  
MP4:  
Records mp4 (AVC) movies. This format is suitable for playback on smartphones  
or tablets, web uploads, email attachments, etc.  
Audio: AAC  
Hint  
You can save images on a computer or copy them to a compatible medium  
using the software PlayMemories Home.  
Note  
When [  
File Format] is set to [AVCHD], the file size of movies is limited to  
approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a  
new movie file will be created automatically.  
When [  
File Format] is set to [MP4], the file size of movies is limited to  
approx. 4 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 4 GB during recording,  
recording will stop automatically.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[126] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Recording movies  
Record Setting (movie)  
Selects the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The  
higher the bit-rate, the higher the image quality.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [  
Record Setting] desired setting.  
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]  
Records high-definition movies by converting them to MP4 file format using the  
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 codec.  
When [  
File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]  
Records high-definition movies by converting them to MP4 file format using the  
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 codec.  
When [  
File Format] is set to [AVCHD]  
60i/50i: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 fields/sec (for 1080 60i-  
compatible devices) or 50 fields/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in  
interlaced mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.  
24p/25p: Movies are recorded at approximately 24 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-  
compatible devices) or 25 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in  
progressive mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.  
60p/50p: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-  
compatible devices) or 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in  
progressive mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.  
When [  
File Format] is set to [MP4]  
Movies shot are recorded in MPEG-4 format, at approximately 60 frames/sec (for  
1080 60i-compatible devices), approximately 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-  
compatible devices), approximately 30 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible  
devices) or approximately 25 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in  
progressive mode, with AAC audio, MP4 format.  
Menu items details  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When [  
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]  
30p 100M/25p 100M:  
Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (30p/25p).  
Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps  
30p 60M/25p 60M:  
Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (30p/25p).  
Bit-rate: Approx. 60 Mbps  
24p 100M*:  
Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (24p). This produces a cinema-like  
atmosphere.  
Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps  
24p 60M*:  
Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (24p). This produces a cinema-like  
atmosphere.  
Bit-rate: Approx. 60 Mbps  
When [  
File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]  
60p 50M/50p 50M:  
Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (60p/50p).  
Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps  
30p 50M/25p 50M:  
Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (30p/25p).  
Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps  
24p 50M*:  
Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (24p). This produces a cinema-like  
atmosphere.  
Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps  
120p 50M/100p 50M:  
Records 1280 × 720 (120p/100p) size movies at a high speed. Movies can be  
recorded at 120 fps/100 fps.  
You can create smoother slow-motion images using compatible editing equipment.  
Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps  
When [  
File Format] is set to [AVCHD]  
60i 24M(FX):  
50i 24M(FX):  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i).  
Bit-rate: 24 Mbps (Max.)  
60i 17M(FH):  
50i 17M(FH):  
Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i).  
Bit-rate: Approx. 17 Mbps (Avg.)  
60p 28M(PS):  
50p 28M(PS):  
Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (60p/50p).  
Bit-rate: 28 Mbps (Max.)  
24p 24M(FX):  
25p 24M(FX):  
Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (24p/25p). This produces a cinema-like  
atmosphere.  
Bit-rate: 24 Mbps (Max.)  
24p 17M(FH):  
25p 17M(FH):  
Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (24p/25p). This produces a cinema-like  
atmosphere.  
Bit-rate: Approx. 17 Mbps (Avg.)  
When [  
File Format] is set to [MP4]  
1920x1080 60p 28M/1920x1080 50p 28M:  
Records the movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).  
Bit-rate: Approx. 28 Mbps (Avg.)  
1920x1080 30p 16M/1920x1080 25p 16M:  
Records the movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).  
Bit-rate: Approx. 16 Mbps (Avg.)  
1280x720 30p 6M/1280x720 25p 6M:  
Records small file size movies in 1280×720 (30p/25p).  
Bit-rate: Approx. 6 Mbps (Avg.)  
* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.  
Note  
60p/50p movies can be played back only on compatible devices.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Movies recorded with the [60p 28M(PS)]/[50p 28M(PS)]/[60i 24M(FX)]/[50i  
24M(FX)]/ [24p 24M(FX)] /[25p 24M(FX)] setting in [ Record Setting] are  
converted by PlayMemories Home in order to create an AVCHD recording  
disc. This conversion can take a long time. Also, you cannot create a disc in  
the original image quality. If you want to keep the original image quality, store  
your movies on a Blu-ray Disc.  
To play back 60p/50p/24p/25p movies on a TV, the TV must be compatible with  
the 60p/50p/24p/25p formats. If the TV is not compatible with the  
60p/50p/24p/25p format, 60p/50p/24p/25p movies will be output as 60i/50i  
movies.  
[120p]/[100p] cannot be selected for the following settings.  
[Intelligent Auto]  
[Superior Auto]  
[Scene Selection]  
[127] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Recording movies  
Dual Video REC  
Allows you to simultaneously record an XAVC S movie and an MP4 movie, or an  
AVCHD movie and an MP4 movie.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Dual Video REC] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
An XAVC S movie and an MP4 movie, or an AVCHD movie and an MP4 movie,  
are recorded simultaneously.  
Off:  
The [Dual Video REC] function is not used.  
Note  
When [  
Record Setting] for an XAVC S movie is set to [60p]/[50p] or  
Record Setting] for an AVCHD movie is set to [60p]/[50p],  
[120p]/[100p], [  
or [  
File Format] is set to [MP4], the [Dual Video REC] function is set to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[Off].  
If you select [Date View] in [View Mode] when playing back movies, XAVC S  
movies and MP4 movies, or AVCHD movies and MP4 movies are displayed  
side-by-side.  
[128] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Recording movies  
Marker Display (movie)  
Sets whether or not to display markers set using [  
monitor while shooting movies.  
Marker Settings] on the  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [  
Marker Display] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
Markers are displayed. The markers are not recorded.  
Off:  
No marker is displayed.  
Note  
The markers are displayed when the mode dial is set to  
shooting movies.  
(Movie) or when  
You cannot display markers when using [Focus Magnifier].  
The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder. (You cannot output the  
markers.)  
[129] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Recording movies  
Marker Settings (movie)  
Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies.  
1. MENU (Custom Settings) [ Marker Settings] desired setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item details  
Center:  
Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting  
screen.  
Off / On  
Aspect:  
Sets the aspect marker display.  
Off / 4:3 / 13:9 / 14:9 / 15:9 / 1.66:1 / 1.85:1 / 2.35:1  
Safety Zone:  
Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be  
received by a general household TV.  
Off / 80% / 90%  
Guideframe:  
Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject  
is level or perpendicular to the ground.  
Off / On  
Hint  
You can display all the markers at the same time.  
Place the subject on the cross point of the [Guideframe] to make a balanced  
composition.  
[130] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Recording movies  
Audio Recording  
Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Audio Recording] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
Records sound (stereo).  
Off:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Does not record sound.  
Note  
The noise of the lens and the product in operation will also be recorded, when  
[On] is selected.  
[131] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Recording movies  
Audio Level Display  
Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.  
1. MENU→  
(Custom Settings) [Audio Level Display] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
Displays the audio level.  
Off:  
Does not display the audio level.  
Note  
The audio level is not displayed in the following situations:  
When [Audio Recording] is set to [Off].  
When DISP (Display Setting) is set to [No Disp. Info.].  
Set the shooting mode to Movie. You can see the audio level before recording  
only in movie recording mode.  
[132] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Recording movies  
Audio Rec Level  
You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Audio Rec Level] desired setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item details  
+:  
Turns up the audio recording level.  
:  
Turns down the audio recording level.  
Reset:  
Resets the audio recording level to the default setting.  
Hint  
When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a  
lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio. When  
you record audio movies with lower volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a greater  
sound level to make the sound easier to hear.  
Note  
Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates.  
[Audio Rec Level] is available only when the shooting mode is set to Movie.  
The [Audio Rec Level] settings are applied for both the internal microphone and  
the  
(Microphone) terminal input.  
[133] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Recording movies  
Audio Out Timing  
You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable  
deviations between video and audio during HDMI output.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Audio Out Timing] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Live:  
Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when audio deviation is a problem  
during audio monitoring.  
Lip Sync:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable  
deviations between video and audio.  
[134] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Recording movies  
Wind Noise Reduct.  
Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise during movie recording.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Wind Noise Reduct.] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
Reduces wind noise.  
Off:  
Does not reduce wind noise.  
Note  
Setting this item to [On] where wind is not blowing sufficiently hard may cause  
normal sound to be recorded with too low volume.  
When an external microphone (sold separately) is used, [Wind Noise Reduct.]  
does not function.  
[135] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Recording movies  
Auto Slow Shut. (movie)  
Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording  
movies if the subject is dark.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [  
Auto Slow Shut.] desired  
setting.  
Menu item details  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
On:  
Uses [  
Auto Slow Shut.]. The shutter speed automatically slows when  
recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow  
shutter speed when recording in dark locations.  
Off:  
Does not use [  
Auto Slow Shut.]. The recorded movie will be darker than when  
[On] is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object  
blur.  
Note  
[
Auto Slow Shut.] does not function in the following situations:  
(Shutter Priority)  
(Manual Exposure)  
[136] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Recording movies  
MOVIE Button  
Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE button.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [MOVIE Button] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Always:  
Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.  
Movie Mode Only:  
Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting  
mode is set to [Movie] mode.  
[137] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Recording movies  
Picture Profile  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc for movies.  
For details on “Picture Profile,” refer to  
http://helpguide.sony.net/di/pp/v1/en/index.html.  
Customizing the picture profile  
You can customize the picture quality by adjusting picture profile items such as  
[Gamma] and [Detail]. When setting these parameters, connect the camera to a  
TV or monitor, and adjust them while observing the picture on the screen.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Picture Profile] the profile you want  
to change.  
2. Move to the item index screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.  
3. Select the item to change using the up/down sides of the control wheel.  
4. Select the desired value using the up/down sides of the control wheel and  
press  
in the center.  
Using the preset of the picture profile  
The default settings [PP1] through [PP7] for movies have been set in advance in  
the camera based on various shooting conditions.  
MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Picture Profile] desired setting.  
PP1:  
Example setting using [Movie] gamma  
PP2:  
Example setting using [Still] gamma  
PP3:  
Example setting of natural color tone using the [ITU709] gamma  
PP4:  
Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard  
PP5:  
Example setting using [Cine1] gamma  
PP6:  
Example setting using [Cine2] gamma  
PP7:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example setting using [S-Log2] gamma  
Items of the picture profile  
Black Level  
Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)  
Gamma  
Selects a gamma curve.  
Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies  
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images  
Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts  
to produce a relaxed color movie. (equivalent to HG4609G33)  
Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal.  
(equivalent to HG4600G30)  
Cine3: Intensifies the contrast in light and shade more than [Cine1] and [Cine2]  
and strengthens gradation in black.  
Cine4: Strengthens the contrast in dark parts more than [Cine3]. The contrast in  
dark parts is lower and the contrast in bright parts is higher than for [Movie].  
ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU709.  
ITU709(800%): Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of  
shooting using [S-Log2].  
S-Log2: Gamma curve for [S-Log2]. This setting is based on the assumption that  
the picture will be processed after shooting.  
Black Gamma  
Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.  
Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)  
Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7  
(maximum black stretch))  
Knee  
Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure  
by limiting signals in high intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of  
your camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When selecting [Still], [Cine1], [Cine2], [Cine3], [Cine4], [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2]  
in [Gamma], [Knee] is set to [Off] if [Mode] is set to [Auto]. To use functions in  
[Knee], set [Mode] to [Manual].  
Mode: Selects auto/manual settings.  
Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.  
Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.  
Auto Set: Settings when [Auto] is selected for [Mode].  
Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)  
Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High/Mid/Low)  
Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected for [Mode].  
Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)  
Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))  
Color Mode  
Sets type and level of colors.  
Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie].  
Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].  
Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1].  
Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional  
cameras (when combined with ITU709 gamma)  
ITU709 Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU709 standard (when combined with  
ITU709 gamma)  
Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.  
S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed  
after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].  
Saturation  
Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)  
Color Phase  
Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)  
Color Depth  
Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
chromatic colors and less effective for achromatic colors. The color looks deeper  
as you increase the setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you  
decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if  
you set [Color Mode] to [Black & White].  
[R] -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)  
[G] -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)  
[B] -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)  
[C] -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)  
[M] -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)  
[Y] -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)  
Detail  
Sets items for [Detail].  
Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to +7)  
Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.  
Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual  
(The details are set manually.))  
V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off  
to the vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to the horizontal (H) side))  
B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper  
DETAIL (W). (Type1 (off to the lower DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the  
upper DETAIL (W) side))  
Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7  
(High limit level: unlikely to be limited))  
Crispning: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep  
crispening level))  
Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)  
Copy  
Copies the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number.  
MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Picture Profile] [Copy]  
Reset  
Resets the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile  
settings at once.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Picture Profile] [Reset]  
Note  
Since the parameters are shared for movie and still images, adjust the value  
when you change the shooting mode.  
If you print RAW images with shooting settings, the following settings are not  
reflected.  
Black Level  
Black Gamma  
Knee  
Color Depth  
If you change [Gamma], the available ISO value range changes.  
There may be more noise in dark parts depending on the gamma settings. It  
may improve by setting the lens compensation to [Off].  
When using S-Log2 gamma, the noise becomes more noticeable compared to  
when using other gammas. If the noise still is significant even after processing  
pictures, it may be improved by shooting with a brighter setting. However, the  
dynamic range becomes narrower accordingly when you shoot with a brighter  
setting. We recommend checking the picture in advance by test shooting when  
using S-Log2.  
Setting [ITU709(800%)] or [S-Log2] may cause an error in the white balance  
custom setup. In that case, set the exposure bright first and then perform  
custom setup.  
Setting [ITU709(800%)] or [S-Log2] disables the [Black Level] setting.  
If you set [Slope] to +5 in [Manual Set], [Knee] is set to [Off].  
S-Gamut is a color space unique to Sony that provides a wide color space  
equivalent to film cameras. However, S-Gamut setting of this camera does not  
support the whole color space of S-Gamut; it is a setting to realize a color  
reproduction equivalent to S-Gamut.  
[138] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Recording movies  
Video Light Mode  
Sets the illumination setting for the HVL-LBPC LED light (sold separately).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Video Light Mode] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Power Link:  
The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.  
REC Link:  
The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.  
REC Link&STBY:  
The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording  
(STBY).  
Auto:  
The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.  
[139] How to Use  
convenient use  
Using shooting functions  
Customizing the shooting functions for  
Memory  
Allows you to register up to 2 often-used modes or product settings in the product.  
You can recall the settings using just the mode dial.  
1. Set the product to the setting you want to register.  
2. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Memory] desired number.  
Items that can be registered  
Shooting mode  
Aperture (F number)  
Shutter speed  
Camera Settings  
To recall registered settings  
Select the memory number from “1” or “2” on the mode dial.  
Then press the right/left side of the control wheel to select the desired memory  
number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M1 through M4 can be selected only when a memory card is inserted into the  
product.  
To change registered settings  
Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same  
mode number.  
Note  
Program Shift cannot be registered.  
For some functions, the position of the dial and the setting actually used for  
shooting may not match. If this happens, shoot images by referring to the  
information displayed on the monitor.  
[140] How to Use  
convenient use  
Using shooting functions  
Customizing the shooting functions for  
Function Menu Set.  
You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function)  
button.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Function Menu Set.] set a function to  
the desired location.  
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection  
screen.  
[141] How to Use  
convenient use  
Using shooting functions  
Customizing the shooting functions for  
Custom Key Settings  
Assigning functions to the various keys allows you to speed up operations by  
pressing the appropriate key when the shooting information screen or playback  
screen is displayed to execute an assigned function.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] set a function  
to the desired key.  
Examples of functions that can only be assigned with custom keys  
Standard:  
Depending on the options selected in [Focus Area] or [Center Lock-on AF], the  
available functions varies when pressing the key.  
When you press the key when the [Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot],  
or [Expand Flexible Spot], you can change the focus area position.  
When you press the key when the [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Center] and  
[Center Lock-on AF] is [On], [Center Lock-on AF] will activate.  
The camera will automatically focus while pressing the key when the [Focus  
Area] is [Wide] or [Center], [Focus Mode] is set to other than [Manual Focus],  
and [Center Lock-on AF] is set to [Off].  
Note  
Some functions cannot be assigned to certain keys.  
[142] How to Use  
convenient use  
Using shooting functions  
Customizing the shooting functions for  
Function of the control wheel  
Once you assign a function to the control wheel, you can perform that function by  
simply turning the wheel when the shooting information screen is displayed.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] [Control Wheel]  
desired setting.  
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection  
screen.  
[143] How to Use  
convenient use  
Using shooting functions  
Customizing the shooting functions for  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function of the focus hold button  
Allows you to assign a function to the focus hold button on the lens.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] [Focus Hold  
Button] desired setting.  
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection  
screen.  
[144] How to Use  
convenient use  
Using shooting functions  
Customizing the shooting functions for  
Function of the AEL button  
Once you assign a function to the AEL button, you can perform that function by  
simply pressing the AEL button when the shooting information screen is  
displayed.  
1. MENU→  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] [AEL Button] →  
desired setting.  
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection  
screen.  
[145] How to Use  
convenient use  
Using shooting functions  
Customizing the shooting functions for  
Function of the AF/MF button  
Once you assign a function to the AF/MF button, you can perform that function by  
simply pressing the AF/MF button when the shooting information screen is  
displayed.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] [AF/MF Button]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
desired setting.  
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection  
screen.  
[146] How to Use  
convenient use  
Using shooting functions  
Customizing the shooting functions for  
Function of the Custom button  
Once you assign a function to the Custom button, you can perform that function by  
simply pressing the Custom button when the shooting information screen is  
displayed.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] [Custom  
Button] desired setting.  
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection  
screen.  
[147] How to Use  
convenient use  
Using shooting functions  
Customizing the shooting functions for  
Function of the Center button  
Once you assign a function to the center button, you can perform that function by  
simply pressing the center button when the shooting information screen is  
displayed.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] [Center Button]  
desired setting.  
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection  
screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
[148] How to Use  
convenient use  
Using shooting functions  
Customizing the shooting functions for  
Function of the Left button  
Once you assign a function to the left button, you can perform that function by  
simply pressing the left button when the shooting information screen is displayed.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] [Left Button] →  
desired setting.  
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection  
screen.  
[149] How to Use  
convenient use  
Using shooting functions  
Customizing the shooting functions for  
Function of the Right button  
Once you assign a function to the right button, you can perform that function by  
simply pressing the right button when the shooting information screen is  
displayed.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] [Right Button]  
desired setting.  
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection  
screen.  
[150] How to Use  
convenient use  
Using shooting functions  
Customizing the shooting functions for  
Function of the down button  
Once you assign a function to the down button, you can perform that function by  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
simply pressing the down button when the shooting information screen is  
displayed.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] [Down Button]  
desired setting.  
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection  
screen.  
[151] How to Use  
convenient use  
Using shooting functions  
Customizing the shooting functions for  
Dial Setup  
You can switch the functions of the front/rear dial.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Dial Setup] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
SS  
F/no.:  
The front dial is used to change the shutter speed and the rear dial to change the  
aperture value.  
F/no.  
SS:  
The front dial is used to change the aperture value and the rear dial to change the  
shutter speed.  
Note  
The [Dial Setup] function is enabled when the shooting mode is set to “M.”  
[152] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Smile/Face Detect.  
Detects the faces of your subjects and adjusts the focus, exposure, flash settings  
and performs image processing automatically.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Smile/Face Detect.] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Off:  
Does not use the Face Detection function.  
On (Regist. Faces):  
Detects the registered face with higher priority using [Face Registration].  
On:  
Detects a face without giving higher priority to the registered face.  
Smile Shutter:  
Automatically detects and shoots a smile.  
Face Detection frame  
When the product detects a face, the gray face detection frame appears. When  
the product determines that autofocus is enabled, the face detection frame  
turns white. When you press the shutter button halfway down, the frame turns  
green.  
In case you have registered the priority order for each face using [Face  
Registration], the product automatically selects the first prioritized face and the  
face detection frame over that face turns white. The face detection frames of  
other registered faces turn reddish-purple.  
Tips for capturing smiles more effectively  
Do not cover the eyes with front hair and keep the eyes narrowed.  
Do not obscure the face by a hat, masks, sunglasses, etc.  
Try to orient the face in front of the product and be as level as possible.  
Give a clear smile with an open mouth. The smile is easier to be detected when  
the teeth are shown.  
If you press the shutter button during Smile Shutter, the product shoots the  
image. After shooting, the product returns to Smile Shutter mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hint  
When the [Smile/Face Detect.] is set to [Smile Shutter], you can select the  
Smile Detection Sensitivity from [On: Slight Smile], [On: Normal Smile] and  
[On: Big Smile].  
Note  
You cannot use the Face Detection function with the following functions:  
Zoom functions other than the optical zoom  
[Sweep Panorama]  
[Picture Effect] is set to [Posterization].  
When using the [Focus Magnifier] function.  
[Scene Selection] is set to [Landscape], [Night Scene] or [Sunset].  
[
Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].  
Up to eight faces of your subjects can be detected.  
The product may not detect faces at all or may accidentally detect other objects  
as faces in some conditions.  
If the product cannot detect a face, set the Smile Detection Sensitivity.  
If you track a face using [Lock-on AF] while executing Smile Shutter function,  
Smile Detection is performed only for that face.  
[153] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Soft Skin Effect (still image)  
Sets the effect used for shooting the skin smoothly in the Face Detection function.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [  
Soft Skin Effect] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Off:  
Does not use the [  
On:  
Soft Skin Effect] function.  
Uses the [  
Soft Skin Effect].  
Hint  
When [  
Soft Skin Effect] is set to [On], you can select the effect level. Select  
the effect level by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
[
Soft Skin Effect] is not available when [  
Quality] is [RAW].  
[154] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Face Registration (New Registration)  
If you register faces in advance, the product can detect the registered face as a  
priority when [Smile/Face Detect.] is set to [On (Regist. Faces)].  
1. MENU →  
Registration].  
(Custom Settings) [Face Registration] [New  
2. Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter  
button.  
3. When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].  
Note  
Up to eight faces can be registered.  
Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be  
registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask, sunglasses, etc.  
[155] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Face Registration (Order Exchanging)  
When multiple faces are registered to be given priority, the face registered first will  
be given priority. You can change the priority order.  
1. MENU →  
Exchanging].  
(Custom Settings) [Face Registration] [Order  
2. Select a face to change the order of priority.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Select the destination.  
[156] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Face Registration (Delete)  
Deletes a registered face.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Face Registration] [Delete].  
If you select [Delete All], you can delete all registered faces.  
Note  
Even if you execute [Delete], the data for registered face will remain in the  
product. To delete the data for registered faces from the product, select [Delete  
All].  
[157] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Red Eye Reduction  
When using the flash, it is fired two or more times before shooting to reduce the  
red-eye phenomenon.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [Red Eye Reduction] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
The flash is always fired to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.  
Off:  
Does not use Red Eye Reduction.  
Note  
Red Eye Reduction may not produce the desired effects. It depends on  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
individual differences and conditions, such as distance to the subject, or  
whether the subject looks at the pre-strobe or not.  
[158] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Auto Obj. Framing (still image)  
When this product detects and shoots faces, macro shooting subjects or subjects  
that are tracked by [Lock-on AF], the product automatically trims the image into  
an appropriate composition, and then saves it. Both the original and the trimmed  
images are saved. The trimmed image is recorded in the same size as the  
original image size.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [  
Auto Obj. Framing] desired  
setting.  
Menu item details  
Off:  
Does not trim images.  
Auto:  
Automatically trims images into an appropriate composition.  
Note  
The trimmed image may not be the best possible composition, depending on  
the shooting conditions.  
[
Auto Obj. Framing] cannot be set when using zoom functions other than  
the optical zoom.  
Auto Obj. Framing] cannot be set when [  
[RAW & JPEG].  
[
Quality] is set to [RAW] or  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[159] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
SteadyShot  
Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [SteadyShot] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
Uses [SteadyShot].  
Off:  
Does not use [SteadyShot].  
We recommend that you set [SteadyShot] to [Off] when using a tripod.  
[160] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
SteadyShot Settings  
You can shoot with an appropriate [SteadyShot] setting for the attached lens.  
1. MENU (Camera Settings) [SteadyShot] [On]  
2. [SteadyShot Settings] [SteadyShot Adjust.] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Auto:  
Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information  
obtained from the attached lens.  
Manual:  
Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal-length set using  
[SteadyS. Focal Len.]. (8 mm-1000 mm)  
Check the focal-length index (A) and set the focal-length.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
The SteadyShot function may not work optimally when the power has just been  
turned on, right after you point the camera towards a subject, or when the  
shutter button has been pressed all the way down without stopping halfway.  
When using a tripod, make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function because  
this can cause any malfunction when shooting.  
[SteadyShot Settings] will be unavailable when MENU →  
(Camera  
Settings) [SteadyShot] is set to [Off].  
When the camera cannot obtain focal length information from the lens, the  
SteadyShot function does not work correctly. Set [SteadyShot Adjust.] to  
[Manual] and set [SteadyS. Focal Len.] to match the lens you are using. The  
current set value of the SteadyShot focal length will display to the side of  
.
When using an SEL16F28 lens (sold separately) with a teleconverter, etc., set  
[SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set the focal length.  
When you turn [SteadyShot] [On]/[Off], the in-body/in-lens SteadyShot settings  
switch at the same time.  
If a lens equipped with a SteadyShot switch is attached, the settings can only  
be changed using that switch on the lens. You cannot switch the settings using  
the camera.  
[161] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Long Exposure NR (still image)  
When you set the shutter speed to 1 second(s) or longer (long exposure  
shooting), noise reduction is turned on for the duration that the shutter is open.  
With the function turned on, the grainy noise typical of long exposures is reduced.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [  
Long Exposure NR] desired  
setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item details  
On:  
Activates noise reduction for the same duration that the shutter is open. When  
noise reduction is in progress, a message appears and you cannot take another  
picture. Select this to prioritize the image quality.  
Off:  
Does not activate noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.  
Note  
Noise reduction may not be activated even if [  
[On] in the following situations:  
Long Exposure NR] is set to  
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].  
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting] or [Cont. Bracket].  
The shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and [Sports Action], [Hand-held  
Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] is selected.  
The ISO sensitivity is set to [Multi Frame NR].  
You cannot set [  
Long Exposure NR] to [Off] when the shooting mode is set  
to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto] or [Scene Selection].  
Depending on the shooting conditions, the camera may not perform noise  
reduction, even if the shutter speed is longer than 1 second(s).  
[162] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
High ISO NR (still image)  
When shooting with high ISO sensitivity, the product reduces noise that becomes  
more noticeable when the product sensitivity is high. A message may be  
displayed during noise reduction processing; you cannot shoot another image  
until the message disappears.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [  
High ISO NR] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Normal:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Activates high ISO noise reduction normally.  
Low:  
Activates high ISO noise reduction moderately.  
Off:  
Does not activate high ISO noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of  
shooting.  
Note  
[
[
High ISO NR] is not available in the following situations:  
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], [Scene Selection]  
or [Sweep Panorama].  
High ISO NR] is not available for RAW images.  
[163] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Color Space (still image)  
The way colors are represented using combinations of numbers or the range of  
color reproduction is called “color space.” You can change the color space  
depending on the purpose of the image.  
1. MENU →  
(Camera Settings) [  
Color Space] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
sRGB:  
This is the standard color space of the digital camera. Use [sRGB] in normal  
shooting, such as when you intend to print out the images without any  
modification.  
AdobeRGB:  
This color space has a wide range of color reproduction. When a large part of the  
subject is vivid green or red, Adobe RGB is effective. The file name of the image  
starts with “_DSC.”  
Note  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[AdobeRGB] is for applications or printers that support color management and  
DCF2.0 option color space. Images may not be printed or viewed in the correct  
colors if you use applications or printers that do not support Adobe RGB.  
When displaying images that were recorded with [AdobeRGB] on non-Adobe  
RGB-compliant devices, the images will be displayed with low saturation.  
[164] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Grid Line  
Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust  
the composition of images.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Grid Line] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Rule of 3rds Grid:  
Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds  
for a well-balanced composition.  
Square Grid:  
Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition.  
This is suitable to determine the quality of the composition when shooting  
landscape, close-up, or duplicated images.  
Diag. + Square Grid:  
Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.  
Off:  
Does not display the grid line.  
[165] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Auto Review  
You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can  
also set the display time for Auto Review.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Auto Review] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec:  
Displays the recorded image on the screen right after shooting for the selected  
duration of time. If you perform a magnifying operation during Auto Review, you  
can check that image using the magnified scale.  
Off:  
Does not display the Auto Review.  
Note  
When the product is enlarging an image using image processing, it may  
temporarily display the original image prior to enlarging and then display the  
enlarged image.  
The DISP (Display Setting) settings are applied for the Auto Review display.  
[166] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Live View Display  
Sets whether or not to show images altered with effects of the exposure  
compensation, white balance, [Creative Style], or [Picture Effect] on the screen.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Live View Display] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Setting Effect ON:  
Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result  
of applying all your settings. This setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures  
while checking the results of the shot on the Live View screen.  
Setting Effect OFF:  
Shows Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance,  
[Creative Style], or [Picture Effect]. When this setting is used, you can easily  
check the image composition.  
Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in [Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Exposure] mode.  
When [Setting Effect OFF] is selected, the  
View screen.  
icon is displayed on the Live  
Note  
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], [Sweep  
Panorama], [Movie] or [Scene Selection], [Live View Display] cannot be set to  
[Setting Effect OFF].  
When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], the brightness of the  
shot image will not be the same as that of the displayed Live View.  
Hint  
When you use a third-party flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may  
be dark for some shutter speed settings. When [Live View Display] is set to  
[Setting Effect OFF], Live View Display will be displayed brightly, so that you  
can easily check the composition.  
[167] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Bright Monitoring  
Allows you to adjust the composition when shooting in dark environments. By  
extending the exposure time, you can check the composition on the  
viewfinder/monitor even in dark locations such as under the night sky.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] assign the  
[Bright Monitoring] function to the desired key.  
2. Press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function, then  
shoot an image.  
The brightness due to [Bright Monitoring] will continue after shooting.  
To return the monitor brightness to normal, press the key to which you  
assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function once again.  
Note  
During [Bright Monitoring], [Live View Display] will automatically switch to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[Setting Effect OFF], and setting values such as exposure compensation will  
not be reflected in the live view display. It is recommended that you use [Bright  
Monitoring] only in dark locations.  
[Bright Monitoring] will be automatically cancelled in the following situations.  
When the camera is turned off.  
When the mode dial is turned.  
When the focus mode is set to other than manual focus.  
When [  
MF Assist] is set to [On].  
When [Focus Magnifier] is selected.  
When [Focus Settings] is selected.  
During [Bright Monitoring], the shutter speed may be slower than normal while  
shooting in dark locations.  
[168] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
FINDER/MONITOR  
Sets the method for switching the display between Electronic Viewfinder and the  
screen.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [FINDER/MONITOR] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Auto:  
When you look into the Electronic Viewfinder, the display is switched to the  
Electronic Viewfinder automatically.  
Viewfinder(Manual):  
The screen is turned off and the image is displayed only in the Electronic  
Viewfinder.  
Monitor(Manual):  
The Electronic Viewfinder is turned off and the image is always displayed on the  
screen.  
Hint  
You can assign the [FINDER/MONITOR] function to your preferred key. MENU  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] set [Finder/Monitor Sel.]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
to the preferred key.  
To turn off automatic switching of the display using the eye sensor, set  
[FINDER/MONITOR] to [Viewfinder(Manual)] or [Monitor(Manual)].  
[169] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Release w/o Lens  
Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no lens is attached.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Release w/o Lens] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Enable:  
Releases the shutter when no lens is attached. Select [Enable] when attaching the  
product to an astronomical telescope, etc.  
Disable:  
Does not release the shutter when a lens is not attached.  
Note  
Correct metering cannot be achieved when you use lenses that do not provide  
a lens contact, such as the lens of an astronomical telescope. In such cases,  
adjust the exposure manually by checking it on the recorded image.  
[170] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Release w/o Card  
Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been  
inserted.  
1. MENU→  
(Custom Settings) [Release w/o Card] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Enable:  
Releases the shutter even if no memory card has been inserted.  
Disable:  
Does not release the shutter when no memory card has been inserted.  
Note  
When no memory card has been inserted, the images shot will not be saved.  
The default setting is [Enable]. It is recommended that you select [Disable] prior  
to actual shooting.  
[171] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Silent Shooting (still image)  
You can shoot images without the shutter sound.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [  
Silent Shooting] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
You can shoot images without the shutter sound.  
Off:  
[
Silent Shooting] is deactivated.  
Note  
Use the [  
Silent Shooting] function on your own responsibility, while taking  
sufficient consideration to the privacy and portrait rights of the subject.  
Even if [  
Even if [  
Silent Shooting] is set to [On], it will not be completely silent.  
Silent Shooting] is set to [On], the operating sound of the aperture  
and focus will sound.  
When shooting still images using the [  
Silent Shooting] function with low  
ISO sensitivity, if you point the camera at a very bright light source, high  
intensity areas on the monitor may be recorded in darker tones.  
When the power is turned off, the shutter sound may beep in rare occasions.  
This is not a malfunction.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Image distortion caused by the movement of the subject or the camera may  
occur.  
If you shoot images under instantaneous lightning or flickering lights, such as  
the flash light from other cameras or fluorescent lighting, a striping effect may  
occur on the image.  
If you want to turn off the beep that sounds when the subject is in focus or the  
self-timer operates, set [Audio signals] to [Off].  
Even if [  
Silent Shooting] is set to [On], the shutter sound may beep under  
the following circumstances:  
[White Balance] is set to [Custom Setup]  
[Face Registration]  
You cannot select [  
P/A/S/M.  
Silent Shooting] when the mode dial is set to other than  
When [  
Silent Shooting] is set to [On], the following functions are not  
available:  
[Cont. Shooting]  
Flash shooting  
Auto HDR  
Picture Effect  
Picture Profile  
Long Exposure NR  
e-Front Curtain Shut.  
S. Auto Img. Extract.  
BULB shooting  
Multi Frame NR  
When shooting using a function downloaded from PlayMemories Camera Apps,  
[
Silent Shooting] is canceled.  
When shooting images using [  
ISO at the lower end of values.  
Silent Shooting], you cannot set an extended  
After you turn the camera on, the time in which you can start recording is  
extended by approximately 0.5 seconds.  
[172] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
e-Front Curtain Shut.  
The electronic front curtain shutter function shortens the time lag between shutter  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
releases.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [e-Front Curtain Shut.] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
Uses the electronic front curtain shutter function.  
Off:  
Does not use the electronic front curtain shutter function.  
Note  
When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the  
ghosting of a blurred area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting  
conditions. In such cases, set this function to [Off].  
When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta  
lens) is used, set this function to [Off]. If you set this function to [On], the  
correct exposure will not be set or the image brightness will be uneven.  
When you shoot at high shutter speeds, the image brightness may become  
uneven depending on the shooting environment. In such cases, set [e-Front  
Curtain Shut.] to [Off].  
[173] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
S. Auto Img. Extract.  
Sets whether or not to save all the images that were shot continuously in  
[Superior Auto].  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [S. Auto Img. Extract.] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Auto:  
Saves one appropriate image selected by the product.  
Off:  
Saves all of the images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
Even if you set [S. Auto Img. Extract.] to [Off] with [Hand-held Twilight] selected  
as the scene recognition mode, one combined image is saved.  
When the [ Auto Obj. Framing] function is activated, two images are saved  
even if you set [S. Auto Img. Extract.] to [Auto].  
When [  
Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the shooting function will  
be limited.  
[174] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
APS-C/Super 35mm  
Sets whether to record in APS-C-equivalent size for still images and in Super  
35mm-equivalent size for movies.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [APS-C/Super 35mm] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
Records in either APS-C-equivalent size or Super 35mm-equivalent size.  
Auto:  
Automatically sets the capture range depending on the lens.  
Off:  
Always captures 35mm full-size image sensor pictures.  
Note  
When you attach an APS-C compatible lens and set [APS-C/Super 35mm] to  
[Off], shooting may fail.  
When you set [APS-C/Super 35mm] to [On], the angle of view will be the same  
as when shooting with an APS-C size image sensor.  
When [  
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [APS-C/Super 35mm] can be set  
to [Off] or [On].  
[175] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shading Comp.  
Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen, caused by certain lens  
characteristics.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Lens Comp.] [Shading Comp.] →  
desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Auto:  
Compensates for darker corners of the screen automatically.  
Off:  
Does not compensate for darker corners of the screen.  
Note  
This function is only available when using an automatic compensation  
compliant lens.  
The amount of light around the edges may not be corrected, depending on the  
lens type.  
[176] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Chro. Aber. Comp.  
Reduces the color deviation at the corners of the screen, caused by certain lens  
characteristics.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Lens Comp.] [Chro. Aber. Comp.] →  
desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Auto:  
Reduces the color deviation automatically.  
Off:  
Does not compensate for the color deviation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
This function is only available when using an automatic compensation  
compliant lens.  
[177] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Distortion Comp.  
Compensates for the distortion of the screen, caused by certain lens  
characteristics.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Lens Comp.] [Distortion Comp.] →  
desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Auto:  
Compensates for distortion of the screen automatically.  
Off:  
Does not compensate for distortion of the screen.  
Note  
This function is only available when using an automatic compensation  
compliant lens.  
Depending on the attached lens, [Distortion Comp.] is fixed to [Auto], and you  
cannot select [Off].  
[178] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Dial / Wheel Lock  
You can set whether the dial and wheel will be locked by pressing and holding the  
Fn (Function) button.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Dial / Wheel Lock] desired setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item details  
Lock:  
Locks the front dial, rear dial and control wheel.  
Unlock:  
Does not lock the front dial, rear dial or control wheel even if you press and hold  
the Fn (Function) button.  
Hint  
You can release the locked dial/control wheel by holding the Fn (Function)  
button down.  
[179] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Deactivate Monitor  
When you press the key to which the [Deactivate Monitor] function has been  
assigned, the monitor turns black, and the screen display is locked to [No Disp.  
Info.].  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] set the  
[Deactivate Monitor] function to the desired key.  
2. Press the key to which [Deactivate Monitor] was assigned.  
Note  
Even if you perform [Deactivate Monitor], the backlight of monitor remains on.  
To turn off the backlight, switch the monitor mode to viewfinder mode using the  
[FINDER/MONITOR] function.  
[180] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Aperture Preview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The image on the monitor or viewfinder may have an aperture value different from  
that of the actual image to be shot. Since the blurring of a subject changes if the  
aperture is changed, the blurriness of the actual picture will differ from the image  
you were viewing prior to shooting.  
While you press and hold the key to which you assigned the [Aperture Preview]  
function, the aperture is stepped down to the set aperture value and you can  
check the blurriness prior to shooting.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] set the  
[Aperture Preview] function to the desired key.  
2. Confirm the image by pressing the key to which [Aperture Preview] was  
assigned.  
Hint  
Although you can change the aperture value during the preview, the subject  
may be defocused if you select a brighter aperture. We recommend that you  
adjust the focus again.  
[181] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Shot. Result Preview  
The image on the monitor or viewfinder may have an aperture value different from  
that of the actual image to be shot. Since the blurring of a subject changes if the  
aperture is changed, the blurriness of the actual picture will differ from the image  
you were viewing prior to shooting. While pressing down the key to which [Shot.  
Result Preview] is assigned, you can check the image preview with the DRO,  
shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings applied. Check the shooting  
result preview before shooting.  
1. MENU →  
(Custom Settings) [Custom Key Settings] set the [Shot.  
Result Preview] function to the desired key.  
2. Confirm the image by pressing the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] was  
assigned.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hint  
The DRO settings, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings you  
have set are reflected on the image for [Shot. Result Preview], but some  
effects cannot be previewed depending on the shooting settings. Even in that  
case, the settings you have selected will be applied to the images you shoot.  
[182] How to Use  
Using shooting functions  
Setting the other functions of this product  
Assigning exposure value adjustment to the control  
wheel  
By assigning exposure adjustment (aperture and shutter speed) to the control  
wheel in advance, you can adjust the value by turning the control wheel when the  
screen is in shooting mode. This allows you to quietly adjust the value while  
shooting movies.  
1. MENU→  
(Custom Settings)[Custom Key Settings][Control Wheel]→  
select [Aperture] or [Shutter Speed].  
[183] How to Use  
Viewing  
Viewing still images  
Playing back images  
Plays back the recorded images.  
1. Press the  
(Playback) button to switch to the playback mode.  
2. Select the image with the control wheel.  
Hint  
The product creates an image database file on a memory card to record and  
play back images. An image that is not registered in the image database file  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
may not be played back correctly. To play back images shot using other  
devices, register those images to the image database file using MENU →  
[Setup] [Recover Image DB].  
[184] How to Use  
Viewing  
Viewing still images  
Playback zoom  
Enlarges the image being played back.  
1. Display the image you want to enlarge, and then press the  
Turn the control wheel to adjust the zoom scale.  
button.  
By rotating the front/rear dial, you can switch to the previous or next  
image while keeping the same zoom scale.  
The view will zoom in on the part of the image where the camera focused  
during shooting. If the focus location information cannot be obtained, the  
camera will zoom in on the center of the image.  
2. Select the portion you want to enlarge by pressing the top/bottom/right/left  
side of the control wheel.  
3. Press the MENU button, or  
playback zoom.  
in the center of the control wheel to exit the  
Hint  
You can also enlarge an image being played back using MENU.  
Note  
You cannot enlarge movies.  
[185] How to Use  
Viewing  
Viewing still images  
Image Index  
You can display multiple images at the same time in playback mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. Press the  
(Image Index) button while the image is being played back.  
To change the number of images to be displayed  
MENU →  
(Playback) [Image Index] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
9 Images/25 Images  
To return to single-image playback  
Select the desired image and press  
on the center of the control wheel.  
To display a desired image quickly  
Select the bar on the left of the image index screen using the control wheel, then  
press the top/bottom side of the control wheel. While the bar is being selected,  
you can display the calendar screen or folder selection screen by pressing  
the center. In addition, you can switch View Mode by selecting an icon.  
in  
[186] How to Use  
Viewing  
Viewing still images  
Switching the screen display (during playback)  
Switches the screen display.  
1. Press the DISP (Display Setting) button.  
The screen display switches in the order “Display Info. Histogram No  
Disp. Info. Display Info.” each time you press the DISP button.  
The DISP (Display Setting) settings are applied for the Auto Review  
display.  
Note  
The histogram is not displayed in the following situations:  
During movie playback  
During scrolling playback of panoramic images  
During slideshows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
During Folder View (MP4)  
During AVCHD View  
During XAVC S 4K View  
During XAVC S HD View  
[187] How to Use  
Viewing  
Deleting images  
Deleting a displayed image  
You can delete an image displayed.  
1. Display the image you want to delete.  
2. Press the  
(Delete) button.  
3. Select [Delete] using the control wheel, then press  
control wheel.  
on the center of the  
[188] How to Use  
Viewing  
Deleting images  
Deleting multiple selected images  
You can delete multiple selected images.  
1. MENU →  
(Playback) [Delete] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Multiple Img.:  
Deletes the selected images.  
(1) Select the images to be deleted, then press  
on the center of the control  
wheel. The  
again to remove the  
(2) To delete other images, repeat step (1).  
(3) MENU [OK] Press on the center.  
mark is displayed in the check box. To cancel the selection, press  
mark.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
All in this Folder:  
Deletes all images in the selected folder.  
All with this date:  
Deletes all images in the selected date range.  
Hint  
Perform [Format] to delete all images, including protected images.  
Note  
The menu items that can be selected differ depending on the [View Mode]  
setting.  
[189] How to Use  
Viewing  
Playing back movies  
Playing back movies  
Plays back the recorded movies.  
1. Press the  
(playback) button to switch to playback mode.  
2. Select the movie to be played back using the control wheel.  
3. To play back movies, press  
on the center.  
Available operations during movie playback  
You can perform slow playback and sound volume adjustment, etc. by pressing  
the bottom side of the control wheel.  
: Playback  
: Pause  
: Fast-forward  
: Fast-rewind  
: Forward slow playback  
: Reverse slow playback  
: Next movie file  
: Previous movie file  
: Displays the next frame  
: Displays the previous frame  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
: Sound volume adjustment  
: Closes the operation panel  
Hint  
“Forward slow playback,” “Reverse slow playback,” “Displays the next frame”  
and “Displays the previous frame” are available during pause.  
[190] How to Use  
Viewing  
Viewing panoramic images  
Playing back panoramic images  
The product automatically scrolls a panoramic image from end to end.  
1. Press the  
2. Select the panoramic image to be played back using the control wheel.  
3. Press on the center to play back the image.  
(playback) button to switch to playback mode.  
To pause playback, press  
on the center again.  
To return to the display of the entire image, press the MENU button.  
Note  
Panoramic images shot using other products may be displayed in a different  
size from the actual size, or may not scroll correctly.  
[191] How to Use  
Viewing  
Printing  
Specify Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
You can specify in advance on the memory card which still images you want to  
print out later.  
The  
(print order) icon will appear on the specified images. DPOF refers to  
“Digital Print Order Format.”  
1. MENU   
(Playback) [Specify Printing] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Multiple Img.:  
Selects images to order printing.  
(1) Select an image and press  
on the center of the control wheel. The  
and delete  
mark is displayed in the check box. To cancel the selection, press  
the mark.  
(2) Repeat step (1) to print other images.  
(3) MENU [OK] Press  
Cancel All:  
on the center.  
Clears all DPOF marks.  
Print Setting:  
You can set whether to print the date on images registered with DPOF marks.  
Note  
You cannot add the DPOF mark to the following files:  
Movies  
RAW images  
[192] How to Use  
Viewing  
Using viewing functions  
View Mode  
Sets the View Mode (image display method).  
1. MENU →  
(Playback) [View Mode] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Date View:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Displays the images by date.  
Folder View(Still):  
Displays only still images.  
Folder View(MP4):  
Displays only MP4-format movies.  
AVCHD View:  
Displays only AVCHD-format movies.  
XAVC S HD View:  
Displays only XAVC S HD-format movies.  
XAVC S 4K View:  
Displays only XAVC S 4K-format movies.  
[193] How to Use  
Viewing  
Using viewing functions  
Display Rotation  
Selects the orientation when playing back recorded still images.  
1. MENU →  
(Playback) [Display Rotation] desired setting.  
Menu items details  
Auto:  
When you rotate the camera, the displayed image rotates automatically detecting  
the orientation of the camera.  
Manual:  
A portrait image is displayed as a vertical image. If you have set the image  
orientation using the [Rotate] function, the image will be displayed accordingly.  
Off:  
Always displays in landscape orientation.  
[194] How to Use  
Viewing  
Using viewing functions  
Slide Show  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Automatically plays back images continuously.  
1. MENU →  
(Playback) [Slide Show] desired setting.  
2. Select [Enter].  
Menu item details  
Repeat:  
Select [On], in which images are played back in a continuous loop, or [Off], in  
which the product exits the slideshow when all the images are played back once.  
Interval:  
Select the display interval for images from among [1 Sec], [3 Sec], [5 Sec], [10  
Sec] or [30 Sec].  
To quit the slideshow in the middle of playback  
Press the MENU button to quit the slideshow. You cannot pause the slideshow.  
Hint  
You can activate a slideshow only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View] or  
[Folder View(Still)].  
[195] How to Use  
Viewing  
Using viewing functions  
Rotate  
Rotates a recorded still image counter-clockwise.  
1. MENU →  
(Playback) [Rotate].  
2. Press  
on the center of the control wheel.  
The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The image rotates as you press  
on the center. If you rotate the image once, the image remains rotated even  
after the product is turned off.  
Note  
You cannot rotate the movies.  
You may not be able to rotate images shot using other products.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When viewing rotated images on a computer, the images may be displayed in  
their original orientation depending on the software.  
[196] How to Use  
Viewing  
Using viewing functions  
Protect  
Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. The  
on protected images.  
mark is displayed  
1. MENU →  
(Playback) [Protect] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Multiple Img.:  
Applies or cancels the protection of the selected multiple images.  
(1) Select the image to be protected, then press on the center of the control  
mark is displayed in the check box. To cancel the selection,  
again to remove the mark.  
wheel. The  
press  
(2) To protect other images, repeat step (1).  
(3) MENU [OK] Press  
on the center.  
All in this Folder:  
Protects all images in the selected folder.  
All with this date:  
Protects all images in the selected date range.  
Cancel All in this Folder:  
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected folder.  
Cancel All with this date:  
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected date range.  
Note  
The menu items that can be selected differ depending on the [View Mode]  
setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[197] How to Use  
Viewing  
Viewing images on a TV  
Viewing images on an HD TV  
To view images stored on this product using a TV, an HDMI cable (sold  
separately) and an HD TV equipped with an HDMI jack are required.  
1. Turn off both this product and the TV.  
2. Connect the HDMI micro terminal of this product to the HDMI jack of the TV  
using an HDMI cable (sold separately).  
3. Turn on the TV and switch the input.  
4. Turn on this product.  
Images shot with the product appear on the TV screen.  
Hint  
This product is compatible with the PhotoTV HD standard. If you connect Sony  
PhotoTV HD-compatible devices using an HDMI cable (sold separately), the  
TV is set to the image quality suitable for viewing still images, and a whole new  
world of photos can be enjoyed in breathtaking high quality.  
You can connect this product to Sony PhotoTV HD-compatible devices with a  
USB terminal using the supplied micro USB cable.  
The PhotoTV HD allows for a highly-detailed, photo-like expression of subtle  
textures and colors.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the compatible TV.  
Note  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect this product and another device using the output terminals of  
both. Doing so may cause a malfunction.  
Some devices may not work properly when connected to this product. For  
example, they may not output video or audio.  
Use an HDMI cable with the HDMI logo or a genuine Sony cable.  
Use an HDMI cable that is compatible with the HDMI micro terminal of the  
product and the HDMI jack of the TV.  
When [  
the TV or recording device. In such cases, set [  
If images do not appear on the TV screen properly, select [1080i],  
[2160p/1080p] or [1080p] using (Setup) [HDMI Settings] [HDMI  
TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to  
TC Output] to [Off].  
Resolution] according to the TV to be connected.  
During HDMI output, when you switch the movie from 4K to HD image quality or  
vice-versa, or change the movie to a different frame rate, the screen may  
become dark. This is not a malfunction.  
[198] How to Use  
Viewing  
Viewing images on a TV  
Viewing images on a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV  
By connecting this product to a TV that supports “BRAVIA” Sync using an HDMI  
cable (sold separately), you can operate this product's playback functions with the  
TV remote control.  
1. Turn off both this product and the TV.  
2. Connect the HDMI micro terminal of the product to the HDMI jack of the TV  
using an HDMI cable (sold separately).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Turn on the TV and switch the input.  
4. Turn on this product.  
5. MENU →  
(Setup) [HDMI Settings] [CTRL FOR HDMI] [On].  
6. Press the SYNC MENU button on the TV Remote Control, and select the  
desired mode.  
Note  
If the product is not in playback mode, press the  
(Playback) button.  
Only TVs that support “BRAVIA” Sync can provide SYNC MENU operations.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.  
If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV Remote  
Control when the product is connected to another manufacturer’s TV using an  
HDMI connection, select MENU →  
(Setup) [HDMI Settings] [CTRL  
FOR HDMI] [Off].  
[199] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Monitor Brightness  
You can adjust the brightness of the screen.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Monitor Brightness] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Manual:  
Adjusts the brightness within the range of –2 to +2.  
Sunny Weather:  
Sets the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.  
Note  
The [Sunny Weather] setting is too bright for shooting indoors. Set [Monitor  
Brightness] to [Manual] for indoor shooting.  
The monitor brightness cannot be adjusted in the following situations. The  
maximum brightness will be [±0].  
[
[
File Format] is [XAVC S 4K].  
File Format] is [XAVC S HD] and the [  
Record Setting] is [120p]/[100p].  
The monitor brightness is locked at [-2] when using Wi-Fi functions.  
[200] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Viewfinder Bright.  
When using an electronic viewfinder, this product adjusts the brightness of the  
electronic viewfinder according to the surrounding environment.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Viewfinder Bright.] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Auto:  
Adjusts the brightness of the electronic viewfinder automatically.  
Manual:  
Selects the brightness of the electronic viewfinder from the range –2 to +2.  
Note  
The electronic viewfinder brightness cannot be adjusted in the following  
situations. The maximum brightness will be [±0].  
[
[
File Format] is [XAVC S 4K].  
File Format] is [XAVC S HD] and the [  
Record Setting] is [120p]/[100p].  
You cannot use the viewfinder while using Wi-Fi functions. The camera will  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
switch to screen display mode.  
[201] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Finder Color Temp.  
Adjusts the color temperature of the electronic viewfinder.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Finder Color Temp.] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
-2 to +2:  
When you select “-,” the viewfinder screen changes to a warmer color, and when  
you select “+,” it changes to a colder color.  
[202] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Volume Settings  
Sets the sound volume for movie playback.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Volume Settings] desired setting.  
Adjusting the volume during playback  
Press the bottom of the control wheel while playing back movies to display the  
operation panel, then adjust the volume. You can adjust the volume while  
listening to the actual sound.  
[203] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Audio signals  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Audio signals] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
Sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the  
shutter button halfway down.  
Off:  
Sounds are not produced.  
Note  
If [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the camera will not beep when it  
focuses on a subject.  
[204] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Upload Settings(Eye-Fi)  
Sets whether to use the upload function when using an Eye-Fi card (commercially  
available). This item appears when an Eye-Fi card is inserted into the product’s  
memory card slot.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Upload Settings] desired setting.  
2. Set your Wi-Fi network or destination on the Eye-Fi card.  
For details, refer to the manual supplied with the Eye-Fi card.  
3. Insert the Eye-Fi card you have set up into the product, and shoot still  
images.  
Images are transferred to your computer, etc., automatically via the Wi-Fi  
network.  
Menu item details  
On:  
Enables the upload function.  
Off:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Disables the upload function  
Communication status screen display  
: Standby. No images are to be sent.  
: Upload standby  
: Connecting  
: Uploading  
: Error  
Note  
Eye-Fi cards are only sold in certain countries/regions.  
For more information on Eye-Fi cards, please contact the manufacturer or  
vendor directly.  
Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countries/regions where they were  
purchased. Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the  
countries/regions where you purchased the card.  
Eye-Fi cards are equipped with a wireless LAN function. Do not insert an Eye-Fi  
card into the product in locations in which their use is prohibited, such as on an  
airplane. When an Eye-Fi card is inserted into the product, set [Upload  
Settings] to [Off]. When the upload function is set to [Off], the  
will be displayed on the product.  
indicator  
Power save mode will not function during uploading.  
If  
(error) is displayed, remove the memory card and reinsert it, or turn the  
product off and then on again. If the indicator appears again, the Eye-Fi card  
may be damaged.  
Wireless LAN communication may be influenced by other communication  
devices. If the communication status is poor, move closer to the access point  
to be connected.  
This product does not support Eye-Fi “Endless Memory Mode.” Before using an  
Eye-Fi card, be sure that “Endless Memory Mode” is turned off.  
[205] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Tile Menu  
Selects whether to always display the first screen of the menu when you press the  
MENU button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Tile Menu] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
Always displays the first screen of the menu (Tile Menu).  
Off:  
Deactivates the Tile Menu display.  
[206] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Mode Dial Guide  
You can display the description of a shooting mode when you turn the mode dial  
and change the settings available for that shooting mode.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Mode Dial Guide] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
Displays the Mode Dial Guide.  
Off:  
Does not display the Mode Dial Guide.  
[207] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Delete confirm.  
You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as the default setting on the  
delete confirmation screen.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Delete confirm.] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
"Delete" first:  
[Delete] is selected as the default setting.  
"Cancel" first:  
[Cancel] is selected as the default setting.  
[208] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Display Quality  
You can change the display quality.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Display Quality] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
High:  
Displays in high quality.  
Standard:  
Displays in standard quality.  
Note  
When [High] is set, battery consumption will be higher than when [Standard] is  
set.  
[209] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Pwr Save Start Time  
You can set time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode. To return  
to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button  
halfway down.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Pwr Save Start Time] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
30 Min/5 Min/2 Min/1 Min/10 Sec  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Note  
Turn off the product when you do not use it for a long time.  
When using a lens with power zoom, the lens is retracted one minute after the  
product stops operation if [Pwr Save Start Time] is set to [10 Sec].  
The power save function is not activated when power is being supplied via  
USB, when playing back slideshows, when recording movies, or when  
connected to a computer or TV.  
[210] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
NTSC/PAL Selector  
Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV.  
1. MENU (Setup) [NTSC/PAL Selector] [Enter]  
Note  
If you insert a memory card that has previously been formatted with a different  
video system, a message telling you that you must reformat the card will  
appear.  
If you want to record using another system, re-format the memory card or use  
another memory card.  
When you perform [NTSC/PAL Selector], and the setting is changed from the  
default one, a message "Running on NTSC." or "Running on PAL." will appear  
on the start-up screen.  
[211] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Cleaning Mode  
Allows you to clean the image sensor.  
1. Confirm that the battery has been charged sufficiently.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. MENU →  
(Setup) [Cleaning Mode] [Enter]  
3. Turn off the product following the instructions on the screen.  
4. Detach the lens.  
5. Use the blower to clean the image sensor surface and the surrounding area.  
6. Attach the lens.  
Note  
A blower is not supplied with this product. Use a commercially available blower.  
Cleaning can be performed only when the battery level is (3 remaining  
battery icons) or more. The use of an AC-PW20 AC Adaptor is recommended.  
Do not use a spray type blower as it may scatter water droplets inside the  
camera body.  
Do not put the tip of a blower into the cavity beyond the lens mount area, so  
that the tip of the blower does not touch the image sensor.  
Hold the camera slightly face downward so that the dust falls out.  
Do not subject the product to any shock during cleaning.  
When cleaning the image sensor with a blower, do not blow too hard. If you  
blow the sensor too hard, the inside of the product may be damaged.  
If the dust remains even after you cleaned the product as described, consult the  
service facility.  
[212] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Demo Mode  
The [Demo Mode] function displays the movies recorded on the memory card  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
automatically (demonstration), when the camera has not been operated for a  
certain time. Normally select [Off].  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Demo Mode] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
The movie playback demonstration starts automatically if the product is not  
operated for about one minute. Only protected AVCHD movies are played back.  
Set the view mode to [AVCHD View], and protect the movie file with the oldest  
recorded date and time.  
Off:  
Does not show the demonstration.  
Note  
You can set this item only when the product is powered by the AC Adaptor  
(supplied).  
Even if [On] is selected, the product does not start a demonstration if there is no  
movie file on the memory card.  
When [On] is selected, the product does not switch to power save mode.  
[213] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
TC/UB Settings  
The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data  
attached to movies.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [TC/UB Settings] setting value you want to  
change.  
Menu item details  
TC/UB Disp. Setting:  
Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.  
TC Preset:  
Sets the time code.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UB Preset:  
Sets the user bit.  
TC Format:  
Sets the recording method for the time code.  
TC Run:  
Sets the count up format for the time code.  
TC Make:  
Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.  
UB Time Rec:  
Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.  
How to set the time code (TC Preset)  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [TC/UB Settings] [TC Preset], then press  
in  
the center of the control wheel.  
2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.  
The time code can be set between the following range.  
When [60i] is selected: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29  
*
When [24p] is selected, you can select the last two digits of the time code  
in multiples of four from 0 to 23 frames.  
When [50i] is selected: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:24  
3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press  
in the center of the control wheel.  
How to reset the time code  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [TC/UB Settings] [TC Preset], then press  
in  
the center of the control wheel.  
2. Press the  
(Delete) button to reset the time code (00:00:00:00).  
You can also reset the time code (00:00:00:00) using the RMT-VP1K remote  
commander (sold separately).  
How to set the user bit (UB Preset)  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [TC/UB Settings] [UB Preset], then press  
in  
the center of the control wheel.  
2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.  
3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
in the center of the control wheel.  
How to reset the user bit  
1. MENU →  
the center of the control wheel.  
2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the user bit (00 00 00 00).  
(Setup) [TC/UB Settings] [UB Preset], then press  
in  
How to select the recording method for the time code (TC Format)  
1. MENU (Setup) [TC/UB Settings] [TC Format], then press  
the center of the control wheel.  
in  
DF:  
Records the time code in Drop Frame* format.  
NDF:  
Records the time code in Non-Drop Frame format.  
*
The time code is based on 30 frames per second. However, a gap between the actual time  
and the time code will occur during extended periods of recording as the frame frequency of  
the NTSC image signal is approximately 29.97 frames per second. Drop frame corrects this  
gap to make the time code and actual time equal. In drop frame, the first 2 frame numbers  
are removed every minute except for every tenth minute. The time code without this  
correction is called non-drop frame.  
The setting is fixed to [NDF] when recording in 4K/24p, 1080/24p or 1080/25p.  
How to select the count up format for the time code (TC Run)  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [TC/UB Settings] [TC Run], then press  
in  
the center of the control wheel.  
Rec Run:  
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance only while recording. The  
time code is recorded sequentially from the last time code of the previous  
recording.  
Free Run:  
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance anytime, regardless of the  
camera operation.  
The time code may not be recorded sequentially in the following situations even  
when the time code advances in [Rec Run] mode.  
When the recording format is changed.  
When the recording medium is removed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to select how the time code is recorded (TC Make)  
1. MENU (Setup) [TC/UB Settings] [TC Make], then press  
the center of the control wheel.  
Preset:  
in  
Records the newly set time code on the recording medium.  
Regenerate:  
Reads the last time code for the previous recording from the recording medium  
and records the new time code consecutively from the last time code. The time  
code advances in [Rec Run] mode regardless of the [TC Run] setting.  
[214] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Remote Ctrl  
You can shoot images using the RMT-DSLR1 or RMT-DSLR2 remote  
commanders (sold separately). Refer also to the operating instructions for the  
remote commander.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Remote Ctrl] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
Allows remote commander operation.  
Off:  
Does not allow remote commander operation.  
Note  
The RMT-DSLR1 remote commander cannot be used for movie recording.  
The lens or lens hood may block the remote sensor that receive the signals.  
Use the remote commander in the position from which the signal can reach the  
product.  
When [Remote Ctrl] is set to [On], the product does not switch to power save  
mode. Set [Remote Ctrl] to [Off] after using a remote commander.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[215] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
HDMI Resolution  
When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals  
using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output  
images to the TV.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [HDMI Settings] [HDMI Resolution] desired  
setting.  
Menu item details  
Auto:  
The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.  
2160p/1080p:  
Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.  
1080p:  
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).  
1080i:  
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).  
Note  
If the images are not displayed properly using the [Auto] setting, select either  
[1080i], [1080p] or [2160p/1080p], based on which TV is to be connected.  
[216] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60i compatible  
models)  
Set 1080/24p or 1080/60p as the HDMI output format when [  
is set to [24p 24M(FX)], [24p 17M(FH)], or [24p 50M].  
Record Setting]  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [HDMI Settings] [HDMI Resolution] [1080p]  
or [2160p/1080p].  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. MENU →  
(Setup) [HDMI Settings] [  
24p/60p Output] →  
desired setting.  
Menu item details  
60p:  
Movies are output as 60p.  
24p:  
Movies are output as 24p.  
Note  
Steps 1 and 2 can be set in either order.  
When [  
Record Setting] is set to other than the above, this setting is  
canceled, and HDMI video is output according to the [HDMI Resolution]  
settings.  
[217] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
CTRL FOR HDMI  
When connecting this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV using an HDMI  
cable (sold separately), you can operate this product by aiming the TV remote  
control at the TV.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [HDMI Settings] [CTRL FOR HDMI] desired  
setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
You can operate this product with a TV’s remote control.  
Off:  
You cannot operate this product with a TV’s remote control.  
Note  
[CTRL FOR HDMI] is available only with a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[218] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
HDMI Info. Display  
Selects whether to display the shooting information when this product and the TV  
are connected using an HDMI cable (sold separately).  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [HDMI Settings] [HDMI Info. Display] desired  
setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
Displays the shooting information on the TV. The recorded image and the shooting  
information are displayed on the TV, while nothing is displayed on the camera’s  
monitor.  
Off:  
Does not display the shooting information on the TV. Only the recorded image is  
displayed on the TV, while the recorded image and the shooting information are  
displayed on the camera’s monitor.  
[219] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
TC Output (movie)  
Sets whether or not to layer the TC (time code) information on the output signal  
via the HDMI terminal when outputting the signal to other professional-use  
devices.  
This function layers the time code information on the HDMI output signal. The  
product sends the time code information as digital data, not as an image  
displayed on the screen. The connected device can then refer to the digital data  
to recognize the time data.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [HDMI Settings] [  
TC Output] desired  
setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item details  
On:  
Time code is output to other devices.  
Off:  
Time code is not output to other devices.  
Note  
When [  
TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to  
the TV or recording device. In such cases, set [  
TC Output] to [Off].  
[220] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
REC Control (movie)  
If you connect the camera to an external recorder/player, you can remotely  
command the recorder/player to start/stop recording using the camera.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [HDMI Settings] [  
REC Control] desired  
setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
The camera can send a recording command to an external  
recorder/player.  
The camera is sending a recording command to an external  
recorder/player.  
Off:  
The camera is not able to send a command to an external recorder/player to  
start/stop recording.  
Note  
Available for external recorders/players compatible with [  
REC Control].  
REC Control] is set to [Off].  
is displayed, the external recorder/player may not work  
When [  
TC Output] is [Off], [  
Even when  
properly depending on the settings or status of the recorder/player. Check if  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
the external recorder/player works properly before use.  
[221] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
4K Output Sel. (movie)  
You can set how to record movies and perform HDMI output when your camera is  
connected to external recording/playback devices, etc.  
1. Turn the mode dial to  
2. Connect the camera to the desired device via an HDMI cable.  
3. MENU(Setup)[ 4K Output Sel.]desired setting.  
(movie).  
Menu item details  
Memory Card+HDMI:  
Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on  
the camera's memory card.  
HDMI Only(30p):  
Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without  
recording on the camera's memory card.  
HDMI Only(24p):  
Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without  
recording on the camera's memory card.  
HDMI Only(25p)*:  
Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without  
recording on the camera’s memory card.  
*
Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL.  
Note  
This item can be set only when the camera is in movie mode and connected to  
a 4K-compatible device.  
When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(25p)] or [HDMI Only(24p)] is set, the  
[HDMI Info. Display] will temporarily be set to [Off].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The counter does not move forward when 4K movies are being output.  
The following functions are not available when the camera is connected via an  
HDMI cable and the [  
File Format] is [XAVC S 4K], or when the [  
File  
Format] is [XAVC S 4K] and [Dual Video REC] is [On].  
[Smile/Face Detect.]  
[Lock-on AF] under [Focus Area]  
[Center Lock-on AF]  
[Eye AF]  
[222] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
USB Connection  
Selects the appropriate USB connection method for each computer or USB device  
connected to this product.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [USB Connection] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Auto:  
Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the  
computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8  
computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.  
Mass Storage:  
Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and  
other USB devices.  
MTP:  
Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB  
devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their  
unique functions are enabled for use.  
PC Remote:  
Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer,  
including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer.  
Note  
It may take some time to make the connection between this product and a  
computer when [USB Connection] is set to [Auto].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If Device Stage* is not displayed with Windows 7 or Windows 8, set [USB  
Connection] to [Auto].  
* Device Stage is a menu screen used to manage connected devices, such as a  
camera (Function of Windows 7 or Windows 8).  
[223] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
USB LUN Setting  
Enhances compatibility by limiting of USB connection functions.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [USB LUN Setting] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Multi:  
Normally, use [Multi].  
Single:  
Set [USB LUN Setting] to [Single] only if you cannot make a connection.  
[224] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
USB Power Supply  
Sets whether to supply power via the micro USB cable when the product is  
connected to a computer or an USB device.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [USB Power Supply] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
On:  
Power is supplied to the product via a micro USB cable when the product is  
connected to a computer, etc.  
Off:  
Power is not supplied to the product via a micro USB cable when the product is  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
connected to a computer, etc. If you use the supplied AC Adaptor, power will be  
supplied even when [Off] is selected.  
Note  
Insert the battery pack into the product to supply power via USB cable.  
[225] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Language  
Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings and messages.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [  
Language] desired language.  
[226] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Date/Time Setup  
Sets the date and time again.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Date/Time Setup] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Daylight Savings:  
Selects Daylight Savings [On]/[Off].  
Date/Time:  
Sets the date and time.  
Date Format:  
Selects the date and time display format.  
[227] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Area Setting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Sets the area where you are using the product.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Area Setting] desired area.  
[228] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Copyright Info  
You can write copyright information onto the still images.  
1. MENU(Setup)[Copyright Info]desired setting.  
2. When you select [Set Photographer] or [Set Copyright], a keyboard appears  
on the screen. Enter your desired name.  
Menu item details  
Write Copyright Info:  
Sets whether to write copyright information. ([On]/[Off])  
If you select [On], an  
icon will appear on the shooting screen.  
Set Photographer:  
Sets the photographer name.  
Set Copyright:  
Sets the copyright holder name.  
Disp. Copyright Info:  
Displays the current copyright information.  
Hint  
How to use the keyboard  
When manual character entry is required, a keyboard is displayed on the screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Input box  
The characters you entered are displayed.  
2. Switch character types  
Each time you press  
in the center of the control wheel, the character  
type will switch between alphabet letters, numerals and symbols.  
3. Keyboard  
Each time you press  
in the center, the characters corresponding to that  
key will be displayed one-by-one in order.  
For example: If you want to enter “abd”  
Select the key for “abc” and press  
once to display “a” select “  
”((5)  
Move cursor) and press  
select the key for “abc” and press  
twice  
to display “b” select the key for “def” and press  
once to display “d”.  
4. Finalize  
Finalizes the entered characters.  
5. Move cursor  
Moves the cursor in the input box to the right or left.  
6. Delete  
Deletes the character preceding the cursor.  
7.  
Switches the next character to a capital or lowercase letter.  
8.  
Enters a space.  
To cancel input, select [Cancel].  
Note  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can only enter alphanumeric characters and symbols for [Set  
Photographer] and [Set Copyright]. You can enter up to 46 letters.  
A
icon appears during the playback of images with copyright information.  
In order to prevent unauthorized use of [Copyright Info], be sure to clear the  
[Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright] columns before lending out or handing  
over your camera.  
[229] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Format  
Formats (initializes) the memory card. When you use a memory card with this  
product for the first time, it is recommended that you format the card using the  
product for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting  
permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable. Save  
valuable data on a computer, etc.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Format].  
Note  
Formatting permanently erases all data including protected images and  
registered settings (from M1 to M4).  
[230] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
File Number  
Selects how to assign file numbers to recorded still images and MP4 movies.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [File Number] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Series:  
The product will assign numbers to files sequentially up to “9999” without  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
resetting.  
Reset:  
The product resets numbers when a file is recorded in a new folder and assigns  
numbers to files starting with “0001.”  
(When the recording folder contains a file, a number one higher than the largest  
number is assigned.)  
[231] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Select REC Folder  
You can change the folder on the memory card where still images and MP4  
movies are to be recorded.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Select REC Folder] desired folder.  
Note  
You cannot select the folder when [Folder Name] is set to [Date Form].  
[232] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
New Folder  
Creates a new folder on the memory card for recording still images and MP4  
movies. A new folder is created with a folder number one greater than the largest  
folder number currently used. Images are recorded in the newly created folder. A  
folder for still images and a folder for MP4 movies that have the same number are  
created at the same time.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [New Folder].  
Note  
When you insert a memory card that was used with other equipment into this  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
product and shoot images, a new folder may be automatically created.  
Up to 4,000 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder  
capacity is exceeded, a new folder may be automatically created.  
[233] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Folder Name  
Still images are recorded in a folder that is automatically created inside the DCIM  
folder on the memory card. You can change the way folder names are assigned.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Folder Name] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Standard Form:  
The folder name form is as follows: folder number + MSDCF.  
Example: 100MSDCF  
Date Form:  
The folder name form is as follows: folder number + Y (the last digit)/MM/DD.  
Example: 10050405 (Folder number: 100, date: 04/05/2015)  
Note  
You cannot change the [Folder Name] settings for movies.  
[234] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Recover Image DB  
If image files were processed on a computer, problems may occur in the image  
database file. In such cases, the images on the memory card will not be played  
back on this product. If these problems happen, repair the file using [Recover  
Image DB].  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Recover Image DB] [Enter].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Note  
Use a sufficiently charged battery pack. Low battery power during repairing can  
cause damage to data.  
[235] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Display Media Info.  
Displays the recordable time of movies and the number of recordable still images  
for the inserted memory card.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Display Media Info.].  
[236] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Version  
Displays the software version of this product, lens and Mount Adaptor.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Version].  
[237] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Certification Logo (Overseas model only)  
Displays some of the certification logos for this product.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Certification Logo].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
[238] How to Use  
Changing settings  
Setup menu  
Setting Reset  
Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform [Setting Reset], the  
recorded images are retained.  
1. MENU →  
(Setup) [Setting Reset] desired setting.  
Menu item details  
Camera Settings Reset:  
Initializes the main shooting settings to the default settings.  
Initialize:  
Initializes all the settings to the default settings.  
Note  
Be sure not to eject the battery pack while resetting.  
When you perform [Initialize], downloaded applications on the product may be  
uninstalled. To use these applications again, re-install them.  
The value set with [AF Micro Adj.] will not be reset even when [Camera Settings  
Reset] or [Initialize] is performed.  
[239] How to Use  
Using Wi-Fi functions  
Connecting this product and a Smartphone  
PlayMemories Mobile  
To use [Smart Remote Embedded] or [Send to Smartphone], etc., the application  
PlayMemories Mobile should be installed on your smartphone.  
Download and install the application PlayMemories Mobile from your  
smartphone’s application store. If PlayMemories Mobile is already installed on  
your smartphone, be sure to update it to the latest version.  
For details on PlayMemories Mobile, refer to the support page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[240] How to Use  
Using Wi-Fi functions  
Connecting this product and a Smartphone  
Connecting an Android smartphone to this product  
1. Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone.  
2. Select the model name of this product (DIRECT-xxxx: xxxx).  
3. Input the password that is displayed on this product.  
The smartphone is connected to the product.  
[241] How to Use  
Using Wi-Fi functions  
Connecting this product and a Smartphone  
Connecting the product to an iPhone or iPad  
1. Select the model name of this product (DIRECT-xxxx: xxxx) on the Wi-Fi  
setting screen of your iPhone or iPad.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Input the password displayed on this product.  
The iPhone or iPad is connected to the product.  
3. Confirm that your iPhone or iPad was connected to the “SSID” shown on this  
product.  
4. Return to the “Home” screen and launch PlayMemories Mobile.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[242] How to Use  
Using Wi-Fi functions  
Connecting this product and a Smartphone  
Calling up an application using [One-touch(NFC)]  
You can call up a desired application from the application menu of this product by  
touching an NFC-enabled Android smartphone to the product. If the application  
you call up has a feature that works with the smartphone, the product and the  
smartphone will be connected via Wi-Fi. To use this function, register the desired  
application in advance.  
1. MENU →  
(Wireless) [One-touch(NFC)] desired application.  
2. Switch this product to shooting mode, then touch an NFC-enabled  
smartphone to the (N mark) on the product for 1-2 seconds.  
PlayMemories Mobile launches on the smartphone, and the application  
you have registered launches on this product.  
Note  
When the product is in playback mode, the registered application will not launch  
even if you touch the smartphone to the product.  
When you call up an application with one touch, even if that application does  
not work with a smartphone, PlayMemories Mobile on smartphone will launch.  
Exit PlayMemories Mobile without performing an operation. If you do not exit  
PlayMemories Mobile, the smartphone stays in standby connection status.  
[Smart Remote Embedded] is assigned to [One-touch(NFC)] as a default  
setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[243] How to Use  
Using Wi-Fi functions  
Controlling this product using a Smartphone  
Smart Remote Embedded  
You can use a smartphone as the remote controller for this product, and shoot still  
images/movies. The application PlayMemories Mobile must be installed on your  
smartphone.  
1. MENU →  
Embedded].  
(Application) [Application List] [Smart Remote  
2. When the product is ready for the connection, an information screen appears  
on the product. Connect the smartphone and the product using that  
information.  
Connection setting methods differ among smartphones.  
3. Check the composition of the image on the smartphone screen, and then  
press the shutter button (A) on the smartphone to shoot an image.  
Use button (B) to change settings such as [EV], [Self-Timer] and [Review  
Check].  
Note  
When you record movies using a smartphone as a remote controller, the  
monitor of the product becomes darker. Also, you cannot use the viewfinder for  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
still image/movie recording.  
This product shares the connection information for [Smart Remote Embedded]  
with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device  
that is permitted to connect to the product, reset the connection information by  
following these steps. MENU →  
(Wireless) [SSID/PW Reset]. After  
resetting the connection information, you must register the smartphone again.  
Depending on future version upgrades, the operational procedures or screen  
displays are subject to change without notice.  
[244] How to Use  
Using Wi-Fi functions  
Controlling this product using a Smartphone  
One-touch connection with an NFC-enabled Android  
smartphone (NFC One-touch remote)  
You can connect this product and an NFC-enabled Android smartphone with one  
touch, without performing a complex setup operation.  
1. Activate the NFC function of the smartphone.  
2. Switch this product to shooting mode.  
The NFC function is available only when the  
the screen.  
(N mark) is displayed on  
3. Touch the product to the smartphone.  
The smartphone and the product are connected, and PlayMemories Mobile  
launches on the smartphone.  
Touch the smartphone to the product for 1-2 seconds until PlayMemories  
Mobile launches.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About “NFC”  
NFC is a technology that enables short-range wireless communication between  
various devices, such as mobile phones or IC tags, etc. NFC makes data  
communication simpler with just a touch on the designated touch-point.  
NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-range  
wireless communication technology.  
Note  
If you cannot make a connection, do as the following:  
Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone, and then move the smartphone  
slowly toward the  
(N mark) of this product.  
If the smartphone is in a case, remove it.  
If the product is in a case, remove it.  
Check whether the NFC function is activated on your smartphone.  
When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the  
smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].  
If this product and the smartphone are connected when the product is in  
playback mode, the displayed image is sent to the smartphone.  
[245] How to Use  
Using Wi-Fi functions  
Transferring images to a Smartphone  
Send to Smartphone  
You can transfer still images/movies to a smartphone and view them. The  
application PlayMemories Mobile must be installed on your smartphone.  
1. MENU →  
If you press the  
setting screen for [Send to Smartphone] will appear.  
(Wireless) [Send to Smartphone] desired setting.  
(Send to Smartphone) button in playback mode, the  
2. If the product is ready for the transfer, the information screen appears on the  
product. Connect the smartphone and the product using that information.  
The setting method for connecting the smartphone and the product varies  
depending on the smartphone.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item details  
Select on This Device:  
Selects an image on the product to be transferred to the smartphone.  
(1) Select from among [This Image], [All Images on This Date] or [Multiple  
Images].  
The options displayed may differ depending on the View Mode selected on the  
camera.  
(2) If you select [Multiple Images], select the desired images using  
control wheel, then press MENU [Enter].  
Select on Smartphone:  
on the  
Displays all images recorded on the product’s memory card on the smartphone.  
Note  
You can only transfer images that are saved on the camera's memory card.  
You can select an image size to be sent to the smartphone from [Original], [2M]  
or [VGA].  
To change the image size, refer to the following steps.  
For Android smartphone  
Start PlayMemories Mobile, and change the image size by [Settings] [Copy Image  
Size].  
For iPhone/iPad  
Select PlayMemories Mobile in the setting menu, and change the image size by [Copy  
Image Size].  
Some images may not be displayed on the smartphone depending on the  
recording format.  
RAW images are converted to JPEG format when they are sent.  
You cannot send XAVC S or AVCHD format movies.  
This product shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] with a  
device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is  
permitted to connect to the product, reset the connection information by  
following these steps. MENU [Wireless] [SSID/PW Reset]. After resetting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the connection information, you must register the smartphone again.  
When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the  
smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].  
[246] How to Use  
Using Wi-Fi functions  
Transferring images to a Smartphone  
Sending images to an Android smartphone (NFC One-  
touch Sharing)  
With just one touch, you can connect this product and an NFC-enabled Android  
smartphone, and send an image displayed on the product screen directly to the  
smartphone. For movies, you can only transfer MP4 movies recorded with [  
File Format] set to [MP4].  
1. Activate the NFC function of the smartphone.  
2. Display a single image on the product.  
3. Touch the smartphone to the product.  
The product and the smartphone are connected, and PlayMemories Mobile  
automatically launches on the smartphone, and then the displayed image is  
sent to the smartphone.  
Before you touch the smartphone, cancel the sleep and lock-screen  
functions of the smartphone.  
The NFC function is available only when the  
the product.  
(N mark) is displayed on  
Touch the smartphone to the product for 1-2 seconds until PlayMemories  
Mobile launches.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To transfer two or more images, select MENU →  
(Wireless) [Send  
to Smartphone] to select images. After the connection enabled screen  
appears, use NFC to connect the product and the smartphone.  
About “NFC”  
NFC is a technology that enables short-range wireless communication between  
various devices, such as mobile phones or IC tags, etc. NFC makes data  
communication simpler with just a touch on the designated touch-point.  
NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-range  
wireless communication technology.  
Note  
You can select an image size to be sent to the smartphone from [Original],  
[2M], or [VGA].  
To change the image size, refer to the following steps.  
For Android smartphone  
Start PlayMemories Mobile, and change the image size by [Settings] [Copy Image  
Size].  
RAW images are converted to JPEG format when they are sent.  
If the Image Index is displayed on the product, you cannot transfer images  
using the NFC function.  
If you cannot make a connection, perform the following:  
Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone, and then move the smartphone  
slowly toward the  
(N mark) of this product.  
If the smartphone is in a case, remove it.  
If the product is in a case, remove it.  
Confirm that the NFC function is activated on the smartphone.  
When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect the product and the  
smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].  
You cannot send AVCHD format movies.  
You cannot send XAVC S format movies.  
When you save images to a MAC computer using the Wi-Fi function, use  
“Wireless Auto Import.”  
[247] How to Use  
Using Wi-Fi functions  
Transferring images to a computer  
Send to Computer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
You can transfer images stored in the product to a computer connected to a  
wireless access point or wireless broadband router and easily make backup  
copies using this operation. Before starting this operation, install PlayMemories  
Home on your computer and register the access point on the product.  
1. Start your computer.  
2. MENU →  
(Wireless) [Send to Computer].  
Note  
Depending on the application settings of your computer, the product will turn off  
after saving the images to your computer.  
You can transfer images from the product to only one computer at a time.  
If you want to transfer images to another computer, connect the product and the  
computer via a USB connection and follow the instructions in PlayMemories  
Home.  
When you save images to the MAC computer using Wi-Fi function, use  
"Wireless Auto Import."  
[248] How to Use  
Using Wi-Fi functions  
Transferring images to a TV  
View on TV  
You can view images on a network-enabled TV by transferring them from the  
product without connecting the product and TV with a cable. For some TVs, you  
may need to perform operations on the TV. For details, refer to the operating  
instructions supplied with the TV.  
1. MENU →  
(Wireless) [View on TV] desired device to be connected.  
2. When you want to play back images using slideshow, press  
center of the control wheel.  
on the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To display the next/previous image manually, press the right/left side of  
the control wheel.  
To change the device to be connected, press the bottom side of the  
control wheel, then select [Device list].  
Slideshow settings  
You can change the slideshow settings by pressing the bottom side of the control  
wheel.  
Playback Selection:  
Selects the group of images to be shown.  
Folder View(Still):  
Selects from [All] and [All in Folder].  
Date View:  
Selects from [All] and [All in Date Rng.].  
Interval:  
Selects from [Short] and [Long].  
Effects*:  
Select from [On] and [Off].  
Playback Image Size:  
Select from [HD] and [4K].  
*
The settings are effective only for BRAVIA TV which is compatible with the functions.  
Note  
You can use this function on a TV that supports DLNA renderer.  
You can view images on a Wi-Fi Direct-enabled TV or network-enabled TV  
(including wired network-enabled TVs).  
If you connect TV and this product and do not use Wi-Fi Direct, you need to  
register your access point first.  
Displaying the images on the TV may take time.  
Movies cannot be shown on a TV via Wi-Fi. Use an HDMI cable (sold  
separately).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[249] How to Use  
Using Wi-Fi functions  
Changing the settings of Wi-Fi functions  
Airplane Mode  
When you board an airplane, etc., you can temporarily disable all the wireless-  
related functions including Wi-Fi.  
1. MENU →  
(Wireless) [Airplane Mode] desired setting.  
If you set [Airplane Mode] to [On], an airplane mark will be displayed on the  
screen.  
[250] How to Use  
Using Wi-Fi functions  
Changing the settings of Wi-Fi functions  
WPS Push  
If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register  
the access point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup  
(WPS) button.  
1. MENU →  
(Wireless) [WPS Push].  
2. Press the WPS button on the access point you want to register.  
Note  
[WPS Push] works only if the security setting of your access point is set to WPA  
or WPA2 and your access point supports the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)  
button method. If the security setting is set to WEP or your access point does  
not support the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method, perform [Access  
Point Set.].  
For details about the available functions and settings of your access point, see  
the access point operating instructions or contact the administrator of the  
access point.  
A connection may not be enabled depending on the surrounding conditions,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
such as the type of wall material or if there is an obstruction or poor wireless  
signal between the product and access point. If that happens, change the  
location of the product or move the product closer to the access point.  
[251] How to Use  
Using Wi-Fi functions  
Changing the settings of Wi-Fi functions  
Access Point Set.  
You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check  
the SSID name of the access point, security system, and password. The  
password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point  
operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.  
1. MENU →  
(Wireless) [Access Point Set.].  
2. Select the access point you want to register.  
When the desired access point is displayed on the screen: Select the  
desired access point.  
When the desired access point is not displayed on the screen: Select  
[Manual Setting] and set the access point.  
*
For the input method, refer to “How to use the keyboard.”  
If you select [Manual Setting], input the SSID name of the access point,  
then select the security system.  
3. Input the password, and select [OK].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Access points without the mark do not require a password.  
4. Select [OK].  
How to use the keyboard  
When manual character entry is required, a keyboard is displayed on the screen.  
1. Input box  
The characters you entered are displayed.  
2. Switch character types  
Each time you press  
in the center of the control wheel, the character  
type will switch between alphabet letters, numerals and symbols.  
3. Keyboard  
Each time you press  
in the center, the characters corresponding to that  
key will be displayed one-by-one in order.  
For example: If you want to enter “abd”  
Select the key for “abc” and press  
once to display “a” select “  
”((5)  
Move cursor) and press  
select the key for “abc” and press  
twice  
to display “b” select the key for “def” and press  
once to display “d”.  
4. Finalize  
Finalizes the entered characters.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Move cursor  
Moves the cursor in the input box to the right or left.  
6. Delete  
Deletes the character preceding the cursor.  
7.  
Switches the next character to a capital or lowercase letter.  
8.  
Enters a space.  
To cancel input, select [Cancel].  
Other setting items  
Depending on the status or the setting method of your access point, you may want  
to set more items.  
WPS PIN:  
Displays the PIN code you enter into the connected device.  
Priority Connection:  
Select [On] or [Off].  
IP Address Setting:  
Select [Auto] or [Manual].  
IP Address:  
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the set address.  
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway:  
When you set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter the IP address to match  
your network environment.  
Note  
To give the registered access point priority, set [Priority Connection] to [On].  
[252] How to Use  
Using Wi-Fi functions  
Changing the settings of Wi-Fi functions  
Edit Device Name  
You can change the device name under Wi-Fi Direct.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. MENU →  
(Wireless) [Edit Device Name].  
2. Select the input box, then input the device name [OK].  
[253] How to Use  
Using Wi-Fi functions  
Changing the settings of Wi-Fi functions  
Disp MAC Address  
Displays the MAC address of this product.  
1. MENU →  
(Wireless) [Disp MAC Address].  
[254] How to Use  
Using Wi-Fi functions  
Changing the settings of Wi-Fi functions  
SSID/PW Reset  
This product shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and  
[Smart Remote Embedded] with a device that has permission to connect. If you  
want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection  
information.  
1. MENU →  
(Wireless) [SSID/PW Reset] [OK].  
Note  
If you connect this product to the smartphone after resetting the connection  
information, you must register the smartphone again.  
[255] How to Use  
Using Wi-Fi functions  
Changing the settings of Wi-Fi functions  
Reset Network Set.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Resets all the network settings to default settings.  
1. MENU →  
(Wireless) [Reset Network Set.] [OK].  
[256] How to Use  
Adding applications to the product  
PlayMemories Camera Apps  
PlayMemories Camera Apps  
You can add the desired functions to this product by connecting to the application  
download website  
(PlayMemories Camera Apps) via the Internet.  
Press MENU →  
(Application) [Introduction] for information about the  
service and available countries and regions.  
[257] How to Use  
Adding applications to the product  
PlayMemories Camera Apps  
Recommended computer environment  
For details on the recommended computer environments for downloading an  
application and adding functions to the product, refer to the following URL:  
“PlayMemories Camera Apps” website (http://www.sony.net/pmca/)  
[258] How to Use  
Adding applications to the product  
Installing the applications  
Opening a service account  
You can open a service account, which is required to download applications.  
1. Access the application download website.  
2. Follow the instructions on the screen and acquire a service account.  
Follow the instructions on the screen to download the desired application  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
to the product.  
[259] How to Use  
Adding applications to the product  
Installing the applications  
Downloading applications  
You can download applications using your computer.  
1. Access the application downloading website.  
2. Select the desired application and download the application to the product  
following the instructions on the screen.  
Connect the computer and the product using the micro USB cable  
(supplied), following the instructions on the screen.  
[260] How to Use  
Adding applications to the product  
Installing the applications  
Downloading applications directly to the product using  
the Wi-Fi function  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
You can download applications using the Wi-Fi function without connecting to a  
computer. Acquire a service account in advance.  
1. MENU →  
(Application) [Application List] →  
(PlayMemories Camera  
Apps), then follow the instructions on the screen to download applications.  
Note  
If MENU →  
(Wireless) [Access Point Set.] access point to be  
connected [IP Address Setting] is set to [Manual], change the setting to  
[Auto].  
[261] How to Use  
Adding applications to the product  
Starting the applications  
Launching the downloaded application  
Launch an application that has been downloaded from the application download  
website PlayMemories Camera Apps.  
1. MENU →  
(Application) [Application List] desired application to  
launch.  
Hint  
How to launch the applications faster  
Assign [Download Appli.] and [Application List] to the custom key. You can launch  
the applications or display application list only by pressing the custom key during  
the shooting information screen is displayed.  
[262] How to Use  
Adding applications to the product  
Managing the applications  
Uninstalling applications  
You can uninstall applications from this product.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. MENU →  
(Application) [Application List] [Application Management]  
[Manage and Remove].  
2. Select the application to be uninstalled.  
3. Select to uninstall the application.  
The uninstalled application can be re-installed. For details, see the application  
download website.  
[263] How to Use  
Adding applications to the product  
Managing the applications  
Changing the order of applications  
You can change the order in which added applications are displayed on this  
product.  
1. MENU →  
(Application) [Application List] [Application Management]  
[Sort].  
2. Select the application of which you want to change the order.  
3. Select the destination.  
[264] How to Use  
Adding applications to the product  
Managing the applications  
Confirming the account information of PlayMemories  
Camera Apps  
The account information for the “Sony Entertainment Network” that is registered  
on the product is displayed.  
1. MENU →  
(Application) [Application List] [Application Management]  
[Display Account Information].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[265] How to Use  
Using a computer  
Recommended computer environment  
Recommended computer environment  
You can confirm the operating computer environment of the software from the  
following URL:  
[266] How to Use  
Using a computer  
Using the software  
PlayMemories Home  
With PlayMemories Home, you can do the following:  
You can import images shot with this product to your computer.  
You can play back the images imported to your computer.  
You can share your images using PlayMemories Online.  
Also for Windows, you can do the following:  
You can organize images on the computer on a calendar by shooting date to  
view them.  
You can edit and correct images, such as by trimming and resizing.  
You can create a disc from movies imported to a computer. Blu-ray discs or  
AVCHD discs can be created from XAVC S-format movies.  
You can upload images to a network service. (An internet connection is  
required.)  
For other details, please refer to the Help of PlayMemories Home.  
[267] How to Use  
Using a computer  
Using the software  
Installing PlayMemories Home  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1. Using your computer's Internet browser, go to the URL below and download  
PlayMemories Home by following the on-screen instructions.  
An internet connection is required.  
For detailed instructions, visit the PlayMemories Home support page.  
2. Connect the product to your computer using the micro USB cable (supplied),  
then turn the product on.  
New functions may be added to PlayMemories Home. Even if  
PlayMemories Home has already been installed on your computer,  
connect this product and your computer again.  
Do not remove the micro USB cable (supplied) from the camera while the  
camera is in operation or the access screen is displayed. Doing so may  
damage the data.  
A: To the Multi/Micro USB Terminal  
B: To the USB jack of the computer  
Note  
Log on as Administrator.  
It may be necessary to restart your computer. When the restart confirmation  
message appears, restart the computer following the instructions on the  
screen.  
DirectX may be installed depending on your computer’s system environment.  
Hint  
For details on PlayMemories Home, refer to the Help of PlayMemories Home or  
the PlayMemories Home support page (http://www.sony.co.jp/pmh-se/)  
(English only).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[268] How to Use  
Using a computer  
Using the software  
Software for Mac computers  
For details on software for Mac computers, access the following URL:  
Wireless Auto Import  
“Wireless Auto Import” is required if you are using a Mac computer and want to  
import images to the computer using Wi-Fi function. Download “Wireless Auto  
Import” from the URL above, and install it on your Mac computer. For details, see  
Help for “Wireless Auto Import.”  
Note  
The software that can be used varies depending on the region.  
[269] How to Use  
Using a computer  
Using the software  
Image Data Converter  
With Image Data Converter, you can do the following:  
You can play back and edit images recorded in RAW format with various  
corrections, such as tone curve and sharpness.  
You can adjust images with white balance, exposure, and [Creative Style], etc.  
You can save the still images displayed and edited on a computer.  
You can either save the still image as RAW format or save it in the general file  
format.  
You can display and compare the RAW images and JPEG images recorded by  
this product.  
You can rank images in five grades.  
You can apply color labels.  
[270] How to Use  
Using a computer  
Using the software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installing Image Data Converter  
1. Download and install the software by accessing the following URL (English  
only).  
Note  
Log on as Administrator.  
[271] How to Use  
Using a computer  
Using the software  
Accessing Image Data Converter Guide  
Windows:  
[Start] [All Programs] [Image Data Converter] [Help] [Image Data  
Converter].  
For Windows 8, start [Image Data Converter], and select [Help] from the menu  
bar [Image Data Converter Guide].  
Mac:  
Finder [Applications] [Image Data Converter] [Image Data Converter], and  
select [Help] from the menu bar [Image Data Converter Guide].  
Hint  
For details on operation, you can also refer to the Image Data Converter  
support page (English only).  
[272] How to Use  
Using a computer  
Using the software  
Remote Camera Control  
When using Remote Camera Control, the following operations are available on  
your computer.  
Changing this product’s settings and shooting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Recording images directly to the computer.  
Performing interval timer shooting.  
Use these functions after selecting MENU →  
(Setup) [USB Connection] →  
[PC Remote]. For details on how to use Remote Camera Control, refer to the  
Help.  
[273] How to Use  
Using a computer  
Using the software  
Installing Remote Camera Control  
Download and install the software by accessing the following URL:  
Windows:  
Mac:  
[274] How to Use  
Using a computer  
Using the software  
Accessing the Help of Remote Camera Control  
Windows:  
[Start] [All Programs] [Remote Camera Control] [Remote Camera Control  
Help].  
For Windows 8, start [Remote Camera Control], and right-click the title bar to  
select [Remote Camera Control Help].  
Mac:  
Finder [Applications] [Remote Camera Control], and select [Help] from the  
menu bar [Remote Camera Control Help].  
[275] How to Use  
Using a computer  
Connecting this product and a computer  
Connecting the product to a computer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1. Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the product, or connect it to a  
wall outlet (wall socket) using an AC Adaptor AC-PW20 (sold separately).  
2. Turn on the product and the computer.  
3. Check from  
(Setup) that [USB Connection] is set to [Mass Storage].  
4. Connect the product and your computer using the micro USB cable  
(supplied) (A) .  
If you connect the product to your computer using the micro USB cable  
when [USB Power Supply] is set to [On], power is supplied from your  
computer. (Default setting: [On])  
[276] How to Use  
Using a computer  
Connecting this product and a computer  
Importing images to the computer  
PlayMemories Home allows you to easily import images. For details on  
PlayMemories Home functions, see the Help of PlayMemories Home.  
Importing images to the computer without using PlayMemories Home  
(For Windows)  
When the AutoPlay Wizard appears after making a USB connection between this  
product and a computer, click [Open folder to view files] [OK] [DCIM] or  
[MP_ROOT]. Then copy the desired images to the computer.  
If Device Stage appears on a Windows 7 or Windows 8 computer, double-click  
[Browse Files] media icon folder in which the images you want to import  
are stored.  
Importing images to the computer without using PlayMemories Home  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(For Mac)  
Connect the product to your Mac computer. Double-click the newly recognized  
icon on the desktop the folder in which the image you want to import is stored.  
Then drag and drop the image file on to the hard disk icon.  
Note  
For operations such as importing XAVC S movies or AVCHD movies to the  
computer, use PlayMemories Home.  
Do not edit or otherwise process AVCHD movie files/folders from the connected  
computer. Movie files may be damaged or become unplayable. Do not delete  
or copy AVCHD movies on the memory card from the computer. Sony is not  
held liable for consequences resulting from such operations via the computer.  
[277] How to Use  
Using a computer  
Connecting this product and a computer  
Disconnecting the product from the computer  
Disconnects the USB connection between this product and the computer.  
Perform the procedures from step 1 to 2 below before performing the following  
operations:  
Disconnecting the USB cable.  
Removing a memory card.  
Turning off the product.  
1. Click  
(Safely remove USB Mass Storage Device) on the taskbar.  
2. Click the displayed message.  
Note  
For Mac computers, drag and drop the icon of the memory card or the drive  
icon in the “Trash” icon. The product is disconnected from the computer.  
For Windows 7/Windows 8 computers, the disconnect icon may not appear. In  
that case, you can skip steps 1 and 2 above.  
Do not remove a micro USB cable from this product while the access lamp is  
illuminated. The data may be damaged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[278] How to Use  
Using a computer  
Creating a movie disc  
Selecting a disc to be created  
You can create a disc that can be played back on other devices from a movie  
recorded on this camera.  
What devices can play back the disc depends on the disc type. Select a disc type  
suitable for the playback devices you will be using.  
Depending on the movie type, the movie format may be converted when creating  
a disc.  
High-definition image quality (HD) (Blu-ray Disc)  
High-definition image quality (HD) movies can be recorded on a Blu-ray Disc,  
creating a high-definition image quality (HD) disc. A Blu-ray Disc enables you to  
record longer-duration high-definition image quality (HD) movies than DVD discs.  
Writable movie formats: XAVC S, AVCHD, MP4 (AVC)  
Players: Blu-ray Disc playback devices (Sony Blu-ray Disc players, PlayStation 3,  
etc.)  
High-definition image quality (HD) (AVCHD recording disc)  
High-definition image quality (HD) movies can be recorded on DVD media such  
as DVD-R discs, creating a high-definition image quality (HD) disc.  
Writable movie formats: XAVC S, AVCHD, MP4 (AVC)  
Players: AVCHD format playback devices (Sony Blu-ray Disc players, PlayStation  
3, etc.)  
You cannot play these kinds of discs on ordinary DVD players.  
Standard definition image quality (STD)  
Standard definition image quality (STD) movies converted from high-definition  
image quality (HD) movies can be recorded on DVD media such as DVD-R discs,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
creating a standard image quality (STD) disc.  
Writable movie format: AVCHD  
Players: Ordinary DVD playback devices (DVD players, computers that can play  
back DVD discs, etc.)  
Hint  
You can use the following types of 12 cm discs with PlayMemories Home.  
BD-R*/ DVD-R/DVD+R/DVD+R DL: Non-rewritable  
BD-RE*/DVD-RW/DVD+RW: Rewritable  
*
Additional recording is not possible.  
Always maintain your “PlayStation 3” to use the latest version of the  
“PlayStation 3” system software.  
[279] How to Use  
Using a computer  
Creating a movie disc  
Creating Blu-ray Discs from high-definition image quality  
movies  
You can create Blu-ray Discs that can be played back on Blu-ray Disc playback  
devices (such as Sony Blu-ray Disc players or the PlayStation 3, etc.).  
A. How to create using a computer  
With a Windows computer, you can copy movies imported to the computer and  
create Blu-ray Discs using PlayMemories Home.  
Your computer must be able to create Blu-ray Discs.  
When you create a Blu-ray Disc for the first time, connect your camera to the  
computer using a USB cable. The necessary software is automatically added to  
your computer. (An internet connection is needed.)  
For details on how to create a disc using PlayMemories Home, refer to the Help  
guide for PlayMemories Home.  
B. How to create using a device other than a computer  
You can also create Blu-ray Discs using a Blu-ray recorder, etc.  
For details, refer to the device's operating instructions.  
Note  
When creating Blu-ray discs using PlayMemories Home from movies recorded  
in the XAVC S or MP4 movie formats, the image quality is converted to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1920×1080 (60i/50i) and it is not possible to create discs with the original  
image quality. To record movies with the original image quality, copy movies to  
a computer or an external medium.  
To create a Blu-ray Disc from movies recorded in the AVCHD movie format with  
[
Record Setting] set to [60p 28M(PS)]/[50p 28M(PS)], you need to use a  
device that is compliant with AVCHD format Ver. 2.0. The created Blu-ray Disc  
can be played back only on a device that is compliant with AVCHD format Ver.  
2.0.  
[280] How to Use  
Using a computer  
Creating a movie disc  
Creating DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) from high-  
definition image quality movies  
You can create DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) that can be played back on  
AVCHD-compatible playback devices (such as Sony Blu-ray Disc players or the  
PlayStation 3, etc.).  
A. How to create using a computer  
With a Windows computer, you can copy movies imported to the computer and  
create DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) using PlayMemories Home.  
Your computer must be able to create DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs).  
When you create a DVD disc for the first time, connect your camera to the  
computer using a USB cable. The necessary software is automatically added to  
your computer. (An internet connection is needed.)  
For details on how to create a disc using PlayMemories Home, refer to the Help  
guide for PlayMemories Home.  
B. How to create using a device other than a computer  
You can also create DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) using a Blu-ray recorder,  
etc.  
For details, refer to the device's operating instructions.  
Note  
When creating DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) using PlayMemories Home  
from movies recorded in the XAVC S or MP4 movie formats, the image quality  
is converted to 1920×1080 (60i/50i) and it is not possible to create discs with  
the original image quality. To record movies with the original image quality,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
copy movies to a computer or an external medium.  
When creating AVCHD recording discs using PlayMemories Home from movies  
recorded in the AVCHD movie format with [  
Record Setting] set to [60p  
28M(PS)]/[50p 28M(PS)], [60i 24M(FX)]/[50i 24M(FX)] or [24p 24M(FX)]/[25p  
24M(FX)], the image quality is converted and it is not possible to create discs  
with the original image quality. Converting the image quality takes time. To  
record movies with the original image quality, use a Blu-ray Disc.  
[281] How to Use  
Using a computer  
Creating a movie disc  
Creating DVD discs from standard image quality movies  
You can create DVD discs that can be played back on ordinary DVD playback  
devices (DVD players, computers that can play back DVD discs, etc.).  
A. How to create using a computer  
With a Windows computer, you can copy movies imported to the computer and  
create DVD disc using PlayMemories Home.  
Your computer must be able to create DVD discs.  
When you create a DVD disc for the first time, connect your camera to the  
computer using a USB cable. Install the dedicated add-on software following the  
on-screen instructions. (An internet connection is needed.)  
For details on how to create a disc using PlayMemories Home, refer to the Help  
guide for PlayMemories Home.  
B. How to create using a device other than a computer  
You can also create DVD discs using a Blu-ray recorder, HDD recorder, etc. For  
details, refer to the device's operating instructions.  
[282] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Precautions  
Precautions  
Backing up memory cards  
Data may be corrupted in the following cases. Be sure to back up the data for  
protection.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
When the memory card is removed, the USB cable is disconnected, or the  
product is turned off in the middle of a read or write operation.  
When the memory card is used in locations subject to static electricity or  
electrical noise.  
Creating an image database file  
If you insert a memory card that does not contain an image database file into the  
product and turn on the power, the product automatically creates an image  
database file using some of the memory card’s capacity. The process may take a  
long time and you cannot operate the product until the process is completed.  
If a database file error occurs, export all images to your computer using  
PlayMemories Home, and then format the memory card using this product.  
Do not use/store the product in the following places  
In an extremely hot, cold or humid place  
In places such as in a car parked in the sun, the camera body may become  
deformed and this may cause a malfunction.  
Storing under direct sunlight or near a heater  
The camera body may become discolored or deformed, and this may cause a  
malfunction.  
In a location subject to rocking vibration  
Near strong magnetic place  
In sandy or dusty places  
Be careful not to let sand or dust get into the product. This may cause the  
product to malfunction, and in some cases this malfunction cannot be repaired.  
In places with high humidity  
(This may cause the lens to mold.)  
On storing  
Always attach the lens front cap or body cap when you are not using the camera.  
To prevent dust or debris from getting inside the camera, remove dust from the  
body cap before attaching it to the camera.  
Precaution on carrying  
Do not carry the camera with the tripod attached. This may cause the tripod socket  
hole to break.  
On operating temperatures  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your product is designed for use under the temperatures between approximately  
0°C and 40 °C (32 °F and 104 °F). Shooting in extremely cold or hot places that  
exceed this range is not recommended.  
On moisture condensation  
If the product is brought directly from a cold to a warm location, moisture may  
condense inside or outside the product. This moisture condensation may  
cause a malfunction of the product.  
To prevent moisture condensation when you bring the product directly from a  
cold to a warm location, first put it in a plastic bag and seal it to prevent air from  
entering. Wait for about an hour until the temperature of the product has  
reached the ambient temperature.  
If moisture condensation occurs, turn off the product and wait about an hour for  
the moisture to evaporate. Note that if you attempt to shoot with moisture  
remaining inside the lens, you will be unable to record clear images.  
On the functions available with the product  
This camera is compatible with 1080 60p or 1080 50p-format movies. Unlike  
traditional standard recording modes, which record using an interlacing  
method, this product records movies using a progressive method. This  
increases the resolution, and provides a smoother, more realistic image.  
The camera is compatible with 4K 30p/4K 25p/4K 24p-format movies. You can  
record movies in higher quality.  
Notes for when on board an airplane  
In an airplane, set [Airplane Mode] to [On].  
On image data compatibility  
This product conforms with DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) universal  
standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information Technology  
Industries Association).  
Playback of images recorded with your product on other equipment and  
playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your product  
are not guaranteed.  
Notes on playing movies on other devices  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Movies recorded by your camera may not be playable properly on other  
devices. Also, movies recorded by devices other than your camera may not be  
able to playback on your camera.  
Discs of AVCHD movies recorded by your camera can only be played back on  
devices supporting AVCHD format.  
DVD players and DVD recorders do not support AVCHD format, so they cannot  
playback AVCHD movie discs.  
Also, if a high definition image quality (HD) disc recorded with AVCHD format is  
inserted in either of DVD players or DVD recorders, the disc may be unable to  
eject from the device.  
Movies recorded in 1080 60p/1080 50p format can be played back only on  
1080 60p/1080 50p supported devices.  
XAVC S movies can be played back only on XAVC S-supported devices.  
On the monitor, viewfinder, and lens  
The monitor and viewfinder are manufactured using extremely high-precision  
technology so over 99.99 % of the pixels are operational for effective use.  
However, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (white, red,  
blue or green in color) that consistently appear on the monitor and the  
viewfinder. These points are normal in the manufacturing process and do not  
affect the images in any way.  
Exposing the monitor or lens to direct sunlight for long periods may cause a  
malfunction. Exercise caution when placing the product near a window or  
outdoors.  
Do not press against the monitor. The monitor may be discolored and that may  
cause a malfunction.  
Images may trail across on the monitor in a cold location. This is not a  
malfunction.  
If the monitor has drops of water or other liquids on it, wipe it with a soft cloth. If  
the monitor stays wet, the surface of the monitor may change or deteriorate.  
This may cause a malfunction.  
Make sure not to bump the lens or subject it to force.  
Do not carry the camera by the monitor.  
When using the power zoom lens, be careful not to get your fingers or any other  
objects caught in the lens.  
Do not expose the camera to sunlight or shoot sunward for a long time. The  
internal mechanism may be damaged.  
Do not look at sunlight or a strong light source through the lens when it is  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
detached. This may result in unrecoverable damage to the eyes or cause a  
malfunction to the lens.  
Do not use the camera in areas where strong radio waves or radiation is being  
emitted. Recording and playback may not function correctly.  
Shooting with the viewfinder  
When looking through the viewfinder, you may experience symptoms such as  
eye soreness, fatigue, or nausea similar to car-sickness. We recommend that  
you take periodic breaks when shooting with the viewfinder. Determine the  
necessary length and frequency of breaks on your own, as these will vary from  
individual to individual. If unpleasant symptoms occur, stop using the  
viewfinder until they resolve, and consult your doctor if necessary.  
Notes on discarding or transferring this product to others  
When discarding or transferring this product to others, make sure to perform the  
following operation to protect private information.  
Perform [Setting Reset] to reset all the settings.  
[283] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Precautions  
On the internal rechargeable battery  
This camera has an internal rechargeable battery for maintaining the date and  
time and other settings regardless of whether the power is on or off, or whether  
the battery pack is charged or discharged. This rechargeable battery is continually  
charged as long as you are using the product. However, if you use the product for  
only short periods, it gradually discharges. If you do not use the product at all for  
about 2 month(s) it becomes completely discharged. In this case, be sure to  
charge this rechargeable battery before using the product. However, even if this  
rechargeable battery is not charged, you can still use the product as long as you  
do not record the date and time.  
Charging method of the internal rechargeable battery  
Insert a charged battery pack into the product, or connect the product to a wall  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
outlet (wall socket) using the AC Adaptor (supplied), and leave the product for 24  
hours or more with the power off.  
[284] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Precautions  
Notes on the battery pack  
Charging the battery pack  
Charge the battery pack (supplied) before using the product for the first time.  
The charged battery pack will discharge little by little even if you do not use it.  
Charge the battery pack each time before you use the product so that you do  
not miss any opportunities to shoot images.  
You can charge the battery pack even if it is not completely discharged. You  
can use a partially charged battery pack.  
If the charge lamp flashes when the battery pack is not fully charged, remove  
the battery pack or disconnect the USB cable from the camera and then  
reinsert it to recharge.  
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of  
between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 °F and 86 °F). The battery pack may not be  
effectively charged in temperatures outside this range.  
When you connect this product and a laptop computer that is not connected to  
a power source, the laptop’s battery charge may decrease. Do not charge this  
product using the laptop computer for too long.  
Do not turn on/restart a computer, wake a computer from sleep mode, or turn  
off a computer while this product is connected to the computer via USB cable.  
Doing so may cause a malfunction of this product. Disconnect the product and  
the computer before performing the above operations.  
We do not guarantee charging if you are using a self-built or modified computer.  
Charging time (Full charge)  
The charging time is approximately 150 minutes using the AC adaptor (supplied).  
The above charging time applies when charging a fully depleted battery pack at a  
temperature of 25°C (77°F). Charging may take longer depending on conditions  
of use and circumstances.  
Effective use of the battery pack  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Battery performance decreases in low temperature environments. So in cold  
places, the operational time of the battery pack is shorter. To ensure longer  
battery pack use, we recommend putting the battery pack in your pocket close  
to your body to warm it up, and insert it in the product immediately before you  
start shooting. If there are any metal objects such as keys in your pocket, be  
careful of causing a short-circuit.  
The battery pack will run down quickly if you use the flash or continuous  
shooting function frequently, turn the power on/off frequently, or set the monitor  
very bright.  
We recommend preparing spare battery packs and taking trial shots before  
taking the actual shots.  
Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-  
resistant.  
Do not leave the battery pack in extremely hot places, such as in a car or under  
direct sunlight.  
If the battery terminal is dirty, you may not be able to turn on the product or the  
battery pack may not be properly charged. In that case, clean the battery by  
lightly wiping off any dust using a soft cloth or a cotton swab.  
Remaining battery indicator  
The remaining battery indicator appears on the screen.  
A: Battery level high  
B: Battery exhausted  
It takes about one minute for the correct remaining battery indicator to appear.  
The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some  
operating or environmental conditions.  
If the remaining battery time does not appear on the screen, press the DISP  
(Display Setting) button to display it.  
How to store the battery pack  
To maintain the battery pack’s function, charge the battery pack and then fully  
discharge it in the product at least once a year before storing it. Remove the  
battery pack from the camera and store the battery in a cool, dry place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To use the battery pack up, leave the product in slide show playback mode until  
the power goes off.  
To prevent staining the terminal, short-circuiting, etc., be sure to use a plastic  
bag to keep away from metal materials when carrying or storing the battery  
pack.  
On battery life  
The battery life is limited. If you use the same battery repeatedly, or use the  
same battery for a long period, the battery capacity decreases gradually. If the  
available time of the battery is shortened significantly, it is probably time to  
replace the battery pack with a new one.  
The battery life varies according to how the battery pack is stored and the  
operating conditions and environment in which each battery pack is used.  
[285] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Precautions  
Charging the battery pack  
The supplied AC Adaptor is dedicated to this product. Do not connect with other  
electronic devices. Doing so may cause a malfunction.  
Make sure to use a genuine Sony AC Adaptor.  
If the product's charge lamp flashes while charging, remove the battery pack  
being charged, and then insert the same battery pack firmly back into the  
product. If the charge lamp flashes again, this may indicate a faulty battery or  
that a battery pack other than the specified type has been inserted. Check that  
the battery pack is the specified type.  
If the battery pack is the specified type, remove the battery pack, replace it with  
a new or different one and check that the newly inserted battery is charging  
correctly. If the newly inserted battery is charging correctly, the previously  
inserted battery may be faulty.  
If the charge lamp flashes even if the AC Adaptor is connected to the product  
and the wall outlet (wall socket), this indicates that charging has stopped  
temporarily and is on standby. Charging stops and enters standby status  
automatically when the temperature is outside of the recommended operating  
temperature. When the temperature returns to the appropriate range, charging  
resumes and the charge lamp lights up again. We recommend charging the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C to 30°C (50°F to  
86°F).  
[286] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Precautions  
Notes on memory card  
If you repeatedly shoot and delete images for a long time, fragmentation of data  
in a file in the memory card may occur, and movie recording may be  
interrupted in the middle of shooting. If this happens, save your images to a  
computer or other storage location, then execute [Format].  
Memory card formatted with a computer is not guaranteed to operate with the  
product.  
Data read/write speeds differ depending on the combination of the memory  
card and the equipment used.  
We recommend backing up important data, such as to a hard disk of a  
computer.  
Do not attach a label on the memory card itself nor on a memory card adaptor.  
Do not touch the terminal section of the memory card with your hand or a metal  
object.  
Do not strike, bend or drop the memory card.  
Do not disassemble or modify the memory card.  
Do not expose the memory card to water.  
Do not leave the memory card within the reach of small children. They might  
accidentally swallow it.  
The memory card may be hot just after it has been used for a long time. Be  
careful when you handle it.  
Do not remove the battery pack or the memory card or turn the camera off while  
the access lamp is illuminated. This may cause the data on the memory card to  
become damaged.  
If the memory card is used near areas with strong magnetization, or used in  
locations subject to static electricity or electrical noise, the data on the memory  
card may become damaged.  
Do not insert a memory card that does not fit the memory card slot. Doing so  
will cause a malfunction.  
Do not use or store the memory card under the following conditions:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
High temperature locations such as in a car parked under the sun  
Locations exposed to direct sunlight  
Humid locations or locations with corrosive substances present  
To use a Memory Stick Micro media with this product, be sure to insert the  
Memory Stick Micro media into an M2 Adaptor as large as Duo size. If you  
insert a Memory Stick Micro media into the product without an M2 Adaptor as  
large as Duo size, you might not be able to remove it from the product.  
To use a microSD memory card with this product, be sure to insert the microSD  
memory card into a dedicated adaptor.  
When inserting a memory card into a memory card adaptor, be sure that the  
memory card is inserted in the correct direction and then insert it as far as it will  
go. If the card is not inserted properly, it may result in a malfunction.  
[287] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Cleaning this product  
On cleaning  
Cleaning the lens  
Do not use a cleaning solution containing organic solvents, such as thinner, or  
benzine.  
When cleaning the lens surface, remove dust with a commercially available  
blower. In case of dust that sticks to the surface, wipe it off with a soft cloth or  
tissue paper slightly moistened with lens cleaning solution. Wipe in a spiral  
pattern from the center to the outside. Do not spray lens cleaning solution  
directly onto the lens surface.  
Cleaning the camera body  
Do not touch the parts of the product inside the lens mount, such as a lens signal  
contact. To clean inside the lens mount, use a commercially available blower* to  
blow any dust off.  
*
Do not use a spray-type blower as doing so may cause a malfunction.  
Cleaning the product surface  
Clean the product surface with a soft cloth slightly moistened with water, then  
wipe the surface with a dry cloth. To prevent damage to the finish or casing:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Do not expose the product to chemical products such as thinner, benzine,  
alcohol, disposable cloths, insect repellent, sunscreen or insecticide.  
Do not touch the product with any of the above on your hand.  
Do not leave the product in contact with rubber or vinyl for a long time.  
Cleaning the monitor  
If oil from your hand or hand cream, etc., remain on the monitor, the original  
coating may become easily removable. Wipe oil or hand cream off as soon as  
possible.  
If you wipe the monitor firmly using tissue paper, etc., the coating may be  
scratched.  
If the monitor becomes dirty with fingerprints or dust, gently remove the dust  
from the surface, and then clean the monitor using soft cloth, etc.  
[288] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Cleaning this product  
Cleaning the image sensor  
Follow the steps below to clean the image sensor.  
1. Turn off the product.  
2. Remove the lens.  
3. Blow off dust on and around the image sensor surface using a blower for  
camera cleaning.  
4. Attach the lens.  
Note  
A blower is not supplied with this product. Use a commercially available blower  
for camera cleaning.  
Do not use a spray-type blower as doing so may scatter water droplets inside  
the product body.  
Do not insert the tip of the blower into the cavity beyond the lens mount area, in  
order to make sure that the tip of the blower does not touch the image sensor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hold the camera facing slightly downward so that the dust falls out.  
Do not expose the product to any shock during cleaning.  
When cleaning the image sensor with a blower, do not blow too hard. If you  
blow on the sensor too hard, the inside of the product may be damaged.  
If the dust remains even after you have performed cleaning as described,  
consult your service facility.  
[289] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
List of default setting values  
List of default setting values  
The default settings of this product are as follows:  
MENU→  
(Setup) [Setting Reset][Camera Settings Reset] or  
[Initialize][OK].  
Camera Settings  
If you select either [Camera Settings Reset] or [Setting Reset] , the settings under  
[Camera Settings] will be reset to the default settings.  
Image Size  
L: 42M (When [  
L: 36M (When [  
Aspect Ratio] is [3:2])  
Aspect Ratio] is [16:9])  
L: 18M (When [APS-C/Super 35mm] is [On], and [  
L: 15M (When [APS-C/Super 35mm] is [On], and [  
Aspect Ratio] is [3:2])  
Aspect Ratio] is [16:9])  
Aspect Ratio: 3:2  
Quality: Fine  
Panorama: Size: Standard  
Panorama: Direction: Right  
File Format: AVCHD  
Record Setting  
30p 60M/25p 60M* (When [  
60p 50M/50p 50M* (When [  
File Format] is [XAVC S 4K])  
File Format] is [XAVC S HD])  
60i 17M(FH)/50i 17M(FH)* (When [  
File Format] is [AVCHD])  
1920x1080 30p 16M/1920x1080 25p 16M* (When [  
File Format] is [MP4])  
*Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Video REC: Off  
Drive Mode: Single Shooting  
Bracket Settings  
Selftimer during Brkt: OFF  
Bracket order: 0→ →  
Flash Mode: Autoflash  
Flash Comp.: ±0.0  
Red Eye Reduction: Off  
Focus Mode: Automatic AF  
Focus Area  
Wide (Phase detection AF)  
Wide (Contrast AF)  
Focus Settings: ―  
AF Illuminator: Auto  
AF drive speed: Normal  
AF Track Sens: Normal  
Exposure Comp.: ±0.0  
Exposure step: 0.3EV  
ISO: ISO AUTO  
ISO AUTO Min. SS: Standard  
Metering Mode: Multi  
White Balance: Auto  
DRO/Auto HDR  
D-Range Opt.: D-Range Optimizer: Auto  
Auto HDR: Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto  
Creative Style: Standard  
Picture Effect: Off  
Picture Profile: Off  
Zoom: ―  
Focus Magnifier: ―  
Long Exposure NR: On  
High ISO NR: Normal  
Center Lock-on AF: On  
Smile/Face Detect.: Off  
Soft Skin Effect: Off  
Auto Obj. Framing: Off  
Auto Mode: Intelligent Auto  
Scene Selection: Portrait  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Movie: Program Auto  
SteadyShot: On  
SteadyShot Settings  
SteadyShot Adjust.: Auto  
SteadyS. Focal Len.: 8mm (When [SteadyShot Adjust.] is [Manual])  
Color Space: sRGB  
Auto Slow Shut.: On  
Audio Recording: On  
Audio Rec Level: 26  
Audio Out Timing: Live  
Wind Noise Reduct.: Off  
Memory recall: ―  
Memory: ―  
Custom Settings  
Select [Setting Reset] to reset the settings under [Custom Settings] to the default  
settings. If you select [Camera Settings Reset], the settings will not return to the  
default settings.  
Zebra: Off  
MF Assist: On  
Focus Magnif. Time: No Limit  
Grid Line: Off  
Marker Display: Off  
Marker Settings  
Center: Off  
Aspect: Off  
Safety Zone: Off  
Guideframe: Off  
Audio Level Display: On  
Auto Review: 2 Sec  
DISP Button  
Monitor: Display All Info./No Disp. Info./Histogram/Level/For viewfinder  
Finder: No Disp. Info./Histogram/Level  
Peaking Level: Off  
Peaking Color: White  
Exposure Set. Guide: On  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Live View Display: Setting Effect ON  
Disp. cont. AF area: On  
Phase Detect. Area: Off  
Pre-AF: On  
Zoom Setting: Optical zoom only  
Eye-Start AF: Off  
FINDER/MONITOR: Auto  
Release w/o Lens: Enable  
Release w/o Card: Enable  
Priority Set in AF-S: Balanced Emphasis  
Priority Set in AF-C: Balanced Emphasis  
AF w/ shutter: On  
AEL w/ shutter: Auto  
Silent Shooting: Off  
e-Front Curtain Shut.: On  
S. Auto Img. Extract.: Auto  
Exp.comp.set: Ambient&flash  
Reset EV Comp.: Reset  
Face Registration: ―  
APS-C/Super 35mm*: Auto  
*When movie format is set to [XAVC S 4K], [APS-C/Super 35mm] is set to [On].  
AF Micro Adj.*:  
AF Adjustment Set.: Off  
amount: ±0  
* This setting will not be reset even if you perform [Camera Settings Reset] or  
[Initialize].  
Lens Comp.  
Shading Comp.: Auto  
Chro. Aber. Comp.: Auto  
Distortion Comp.: Off  
AF System: Phase Detection AF  
Video Light Mode: Power Link  
Function Menu Set.: ―  
Custom Key Settings  
Control Wheel: Not set  
Custom Button 1: White Balance  
Custom Button 2: Focus Settings  
Custom Button 3: Focus Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Custom Button 4: Not set  
Center Button: Eye AF  
Left Button: Drive Mode  
Right Button: ISO  
Down Button: Not set  
AEL Button: AEL hold  
AF/MF Button: AF/MF Control Hold  
Focus Hold Button: Focus Hold  
Dial Setup:  
F/no.  
SS  
Dial Ev Comp: Off  
Zoom Ring Rotate: Left(W)/Right(T)  
MOVIE Button: Always  
Dial / Wheel Lock: Unlock  
Wireless  
Select [Setting Reset] to reset the settings under [Wireless] to the default settings.  
If you select [Camera Settings Reset], the settings will not return to the default  
settings.  
Send to Smartphone: ―  
Send to Computer: ―  
View on TV: ―  
One-touch(NFC): ―  
Airplane Mode: Off  
WPS Push: ―  
Access Point Set.: ―  
Edit Device Name: ―  
Disp MAC Address: ―  
SSID/PW Reset: ―  
Reset Network Set.: ―  
Application  
Application List: ―  
Introduction: ―  
Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select [Setting Reset] to reset the settings under [Playback] to the default settings.  
If you select [Camera Settings Reset], the settings will not return to the default  
settings.  
Delete: ―  
View Mode: Date View  
Image Index: 9 Images  
Display Rotation: Manual  
Slide Show  
Repeat: Off  
Interval: 3 Sec  
Rotate: ―  
Enlarge Image: ―  
Protect: ―  
Specify Printing: ―  
Setup  
Select [Setting Reset] to reset the settings under [Setup] to the default settings. If  
you select [Camera Settings Reset], the settings will not return to the default  
settings.  
Monitor Brightness: Manual  
Viewfinder Bright.: Auto  
Finder Color Temp.: ±0  
Volume Settings: 7  
Audio signals: On  
Upload Settings: On  
Tile Menu: Off  
Mode Dial Guide: Off  
Delete confirm.: "Cancel" first  
Display Quality: Standard  
Pwr Save Start Time: 1 Min  
NTSC/PAL Selector: ―  
Cleaning Mode: ―  
Demo Mode: Off  
TC/UB Settings:  
TC/UB Disp. Setting: Counter  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TC Format: DF  
TC Run: Rec Run  
TC Make: Preset  
UB Time Rec: Off  
Remote Ctrl: Off  
HDMI Settings  
HDMI Resolution: Auto  
24p/60p Output: 60p  
HDMI Info. Display: On  
TC Output: Off  
REC Control: Off  
CTRL FOR HDMI: On  
4K Output Sel.: Memory Card+HDMI  
USB Connection: Auto  
USB LUN Setting: Multi  
USB Power Supply: On  
Language: ―  
Date/Time Setup: ―  
Area Setting: ―  
Copyright Info  
Write Copyright Info: Off  
Set Photographer: ―  
Set Copyright: ―  
Disp. Copyright Info: ―  
Format: ―  
File Number: Series  
Select REC Folder: ―  
New Folder: ―  
Folder Name: Standard Form  
Recover Image DB*: ―  
*This setting will not be reset even if you perform [Camera Settings Reset] or  
[Initialize].  
Display Media Info.: ―  
Version: ―  
Certification Logo: ―  
Setting Reset: ―  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[290] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Number of recordable still images and  
recordable time of movies  
Number of still images  
The number of still images may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the  
memory card.  
[
Image Size]: [L: 42M]  
When [  
Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2]*  
Standard  
8 GB: 770 images  
16 GB: 1550 images  
32 GB: 3100 images  
64 GB: 6200 images  
Fine  
8 GB: 520 images  
16 GB: 1000 images  
32 GB: 2100 images  
64 GB: 4200 images  
Extra fine  
8 GB: 270 images  
16 GB: 540 images  
32 GB: 1050 images  
64 GB: 2150 images  
RAW & JPEG  
8 GB: 130 images  
16 GB: 260 images  
32 GB: 520 images  
64 GB: 1050 images  
RAW  
8 GB: 170 images  
16 GB: 350 images  
32 GB: 700 images  
64 GB: 1400 images  
*
When the [  
Aspect Ratio] is set to other than [3:2], you can record more pictures than shown  
above. (Except when [  
Quality] is set to [RAW].)  
Note  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Even if the number of remaining shootable images is greater than 9,999, the  
“9999” indicator appears.  
When an image shot with other products is played back on this product, the  
image may not appear in the actual image size.  
[291] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Number of recordable still images and  
recordable time of movies  
Recordable time of movies  
The table below shows the approximate maximum recording times which can be  
recorded on the memory card that is formatted with this product. These numbers  
are the total times of all movie files on the memory card. The recordable time may  
vary depending on the shooting conditions and the memory card.  
The values when [  
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [XAVC S HD], and  
[AVCHD] are based on shooting with [Dual Video REC] set to [Off].  
(h (hour), m (minute))  
[
File Format]:[XAVC S 4K]  
30p 100M  
25p 100M  
8 GB: -  
16 GB: -  
32 GB: -  
64 GB: 1 h 15 m  
30p 60M  
25p 60M  
8 GB: -  
16 GB: -  
32 GB: -  
64 GB: 2 h 5 m  
24p 100M*  
8 GB: -  
16 GB: -  
32 GB: -  
64 GB: 1 h 15 m  
24p 60M*  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8 GB: -  
16 GB: -  
32 GB: -  
64 GB: 2 h 5 m  
[
File Format]:[XAVC S HD]  
60p 50M  
50p 50M  
8 GB: -  
16 GB: -  
32 GB: -  
64 GB: 2 h 35 m  
30p 50M  
25p 50M  
8 GB: -  
16 GB: -  
32 GB: -  
64 GB: 2 h 35 m  
24p 50M*  
8 GB: -  
16 GB: -  
32 GB: -  
64 GB: 2 h 35 m  
120p 50M  
100p 50M  
8 GB: -  
16 GB: -  
32 GB: -  
64 GB: 2 h 35 m  
[
File Format]: [AVCHD]  
60i 24M(FX)  
50i 24M(FX)  
8 GB: 40 m  
16 GB: 1 h 25 m  
32 GB: 3 h  
64 GB: 6 h  
60i 17M(FH)  
50i 17M(FH)  
8 GB: 55 m  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 GB: 2 h  
32 GB: 4 h 5 m  
64 GB: 8 h 15 m  
60p 28M(PS)  
50p 28M(PS)  
8 GB: 35 m  
16 GB: 1 h 15 m  
32 GB: 2 h 30 m  
64 GB: 5 h 5 m  
24p 24M(FX)  
25p 24M(FX)  
8 GB: 40 m  
16 GB: 1 h 25 m  
32 GB: 3 h  
64 GB: 6 h  
24p 17M(FH)  
25p 17M(FH)  
8 GB: 55 m  
16 GB: 2 h  
32 GB: 4 h 5 m  
64 GB: 8 h 15 m  
[
File Format]: [MP4]  
1920x1080 60p 28M  
1920x1080 50p 28M  
8 GB: 35 m  
16 GB: 1 h 15 m  
32 GB: 2 h 35 m  
64 GB: 5 h 20 m  
1920x1080 30p 16M  
1920x1080 25p 16M  
8 GB: 1 h  
16 GB: 2 h  
32 GB: 4 h 10 m  
64 GB: 8 h 25 m  
1280x720 30p 6M  
1280x720 25p 6M  
8 GB: 2 h 35 m  
16 GB: 5 h 20 m  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32 GB: 10 h 55 m  
64 GB: 22 h  
*
Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.  
When using the camera's default settings, continuous shooting is possible for  
approximately 29 minutes (max.) for each shooting at a temperature of  
approximately 25°C (77°F).  
If the file format is set to MP4 (28M), continuous shooting is possible for  
approximately 20 minutes for each shooting (limited by file size of 4 GB).  
Note  
The recordable time of movies varies because the product is equipped with  
VBR (Variable Bit Rate), which automatically adjusts image quality depending  
on the shooting scene.  
When you record a fast-moving subject, the image is clearer but the recordable  
time is shorter because more memory is required for recording.  
The recordable time also varies depending on the shooting conditions, the  
subject or the image quality/size settings.  
Notes on continuous movie recording  
It requires a lot of power to perform high quality movie recording or continuous  
shooting using the image sensor. Therefore, if you continue to shoot, the  
temperature inside the camera will rise, especially that of the image sensor. In  
such cases, the camera turns off automatically since higher temperatures  
affect the quality of the images or affect the internal mechanism of the camera.  
The duration of time available for movie recording is as follows when the  
camera starts recording after the power of the camera has been turned off for a  
while. (The following values indicate the continuous time from when the  
camera starts recording until the camera stops recording.)  
Ambient temperature: 20°C (68°F)  
Continuous recording time for movies (HD): About 29 minutes  
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): About 29 minutes  
Ambient temperature: 30°C (86°F)  
Continuous recording time for movies (HD): About 29 minutes  
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): About 29 minutes  
Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F)  
Continuous recording time for movies (HD): About 29 minutes  
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): About 22 minutes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HD: AVCHD FH (17 Mbps)  
4K: XAVC S 4K (Super 35 mm, 60 Mbps)  
The duration of time available for movie recording varies with the temperature,  
the recording format/setting, or condition of the camera before you start  
recording. If you frequently recompose or shoot images after the power is  
turned on, the temperature inside the camera will rise and the recording time  
available will be shorter.  
When  
is indicated, stop recording the movie.  
If the camera stops recording due to the temperature, leave it for several  
minutes with the power turned off. Start recording after the temperature inside  
the camera drops fully.  
[292] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Using this product abroad  
Plug adaptor  
You can use the battery charger and the AC Adaptor (supplied) in any country or  
region where the power supply is within 100 V to 240 V AC and 50 Hz/60 Hz.  
Note  
Do not use an electronic voltage transformer as doing so may cause a  
malfunction.  
[293] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Using this product abroad  
On TV color systems  
To view movies shot using this product on a television, the product and television  
must use the same color television system. Check the TV color system for the  
country or region where you are using the product.  
NTSC system:  
Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador,  
Jamaica, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the  
U.S.A., Venezuela, etc.  
PAL system:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Croatia, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland,  
Germany, Holland, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia,  
New Zealand, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Rumania, Singapore, Slovak  
Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, Turkey, United Kingdom, Viet  
Nam, etc.  
PAL-M system:  
Brazil  
PAL-N system:  
Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay  
SECAM system:  
Bulgaria, France, Greece, Guiana, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Russia, Ukraine, etc.  
[294] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Other information  
Mount Adaptor  
Using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately), you can attach an A-mount lens (sold  
separately) to this product.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the Mount Adaptor.  
Note  
You may not be able to use the Mount Adaptor with certain lenses. Consult  
your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility on compatible lenses.  
You cannot use the AF illuminator when using an A-mount lens.  
The sound of the lens and the product in operation may be recorded during  
movie recording.  
You can turn the sound off by selecting MENU [Camera Settings] [Audio  
Recording] [Off].  
It may take a long time or may be difficult for the product to focus, depending on  
the lens used or the subject.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[295] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Other information  
LA-EA1 Mount Adaptor  
If you use the LA-EA1 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following functions are  
available.  
Full size shooting:  
Not available  
Autofocus:  
Available with SAM/SSM lens only  
AF system:  
Contrast AF/Phase Detection AF  
AF/MF select:  
Can be changed using the operating switch on the lens.  
Focus Mode:  
Single-shot AF/Continuous AF*  
*
This setting is unavailable when [  
AF System] is set to [Contrast AF].  
When using a Mount Adaptor and the camera is set to movie mode, the Auto  
Focus only works when the shutter button is pressed halfway down.  
When using a Mount Adaptor in movie mode, adjust the aperture manually.  
Available focus area  
When the LA-EA1 Mount Adaptor is mounted, the available focus areas are the  
same as for the available settings of this camera.  
[Zone], [Expand Flexible Spot] or [Lock-on AF] cannot be selected when [  
AF  
System] is set to [Phase Detection AF].  
SteadyShot:  
In-body  
[296] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Other information  
LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor  
If you use the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following functions are  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
available.  
Full size shooting:  
Not available.  
Autofocus:  
Available  
AF system:  
Phase Detection AF, which is controlled by the dedicated AF sensor inside the  
Mount Adaptor  
AF/MF select:  
Lenses that do not support DMF: Can be changed using the operating switch on  
the lens.  
Lenses that support DMF: Can be changed using the operating switch on the lens.  
When the switch on the lens is set to AF, you can use MENU to change the  
focusing method.  
Other lenses:  
Can be changed using MENU.  
Focus Mode:  
Available modes are as follows (Single-shot AF/Continuous AF/DMF*)  
*
Only available when using lenses that support Direct Manual Focus.  
Even if [Priority Set in AF-S] is set to [Balanced Emphasis], the camera will  
temporarily switch to [AF].  
Even if [Priority Set in AF-C] is set to [Balanced Emphasis], the camera will  
temporarily switch to [Release].  
Available focus area  
Wide:  
The product automatically selects a focus area from among 15 areas.  
Center:  
The product uses the focus area located in the center area exclusively.  
Flexible Spot:  
You can select a focus area from 15 areas using the control wheel.  
Lock-on AF:  
When you press the shutter button halfway down, the product will start tracking a  
subject from the selected AF area.  
SteadyShot:  
In-body  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[297] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Other information  
LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor  
If you use the LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following functions are  
available.  
Full size shooting:  
Available with full size shooting-compatible lenses only  
Autofocus:  
Available with SAM/SSM lens only  
AF system:  
Contrast AF/Phase Detection AF  
AF/MF select:  
Can be changed using the operating switch on the lens.  
Focus Mode:  
Single-shot AF/Continuous AF*  
*
This setting is unavailable when [  
AF System] is set to [Contrast AF].  
When using a Mount Adaptor and the camera is set to movie mode, the Auto  
Focus only works when the shutter button is pressed halfway down.  
When using a Mount Adaptor in movie mode, adjust the aperture manually.  
Available focus area  
When the LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor is mounted, the available focus areas are the  
same as for the available settings of this camera.  
[Zone], [Expand Flexible Spot] or [Lock-on AF] cannot be selected when [  
AF  
System] is set to [Phase Detection AF].  
SteadyShot:  
In-body  
[298] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Other information  
LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor  
If you use the LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following functions are  
available.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Full size shooting:  
Available with full size shooting-compatible lenses only  
Autofocus:  
Available  
AF system:  
Phase Detection AF, which is controlled by the dedicated AF sensor inside the  
Mount Adaptor  
AF/MF select:  
Lenses that do not support DMF: Can be changed using the operating switch on  
the lens.  
Lenses that support DMF: Can be changed using the operating switch on the lens.  
When the switch on the lens is set to AF, you can use MENU to change the  
focusing method.  
Other lenses:  
Can be changed using MENU.  
Focus Mode:  
Available modes are as follows  
(Single-shot AF/Continuous AF/Automatic AF/DMF*)  
*
Only available when using lenses that support Direct Manual Focus.  
Even if [Priority Set in AF-S] is set to [Balanced Emphasis], the camera will  
temporarily switch to [AF].  
Even if [Priority Set in AF-C] is set to [Balanced Emphasis], the camera will  
temporarily switch to [Release].  
Available focus area  
Wide:  
The product automatically selects a focus area from among 15 areas.  
Center:  
The product uses the focus area located in the center area exclusively.  
Flexible Spot:  
You can select a focus area from 15 areas using the control wheel.  
Lock-on AF:  
When you press the shutter button halfway down, the product will start tracking a  
subject from the selected AF area.  
SteadyShot:  
In-body  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[299] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Other information  
Vertical grip  
You can attach a vertical grip (sold separately) to this product and record  
vertically oriented images. When attaching the vertical grip, remove the battery  
cover in advance. For details, refer to the operating instructions for the vertical  
grip.  
How to remove the battery cover  
Rotate the battery cover release lever (A) of this product in the direction of the  
arrow.  
The shaft of the battery cover will be stored inside the battery cover.  
Pull the battery cover aside.  
You can attach the removed battery cover to the vertical grip so that you do not  
lose it.  
How to attach the battery cover  
Align the battery cover hinge with the battery cover shaft hole, and attach by  
pressing the battery cover locking button (B).  
After attaching the battery cover, make sure that the head of the battery cover  
release lever (A) is pointing at the base of the arrow mark.  
Note  
When a vertical grip is attached to this product, the battery remaining is  
displayed as  
.
When the vertical grip is attached, you cannot perform the following operations:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Charging the battery pack (If you want to charge the battery pack, insert it into the  
camera, not into the vertical grip.)  
Using the AC Adaptor AC-PW20 (sold separately)  
[300] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Other information  
AVCHD format  
The AVCHD format was developed for high-definition digital video cameras when  
recording an HD (High-Definition) signal using high-efficiency compression coding  
technology. The MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format is used to compress video data, and  
the Dolby Digital or Linear PCM system is used to compress audio data.  
The MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format is capable of compressing images at higher  
efficiency than that of the conventional image compressing format.  
As the AVCHD format uses compression coding technology, the picture may be  
unstable in scenes where the screen, angle of view, or brightness, etc. change  
drastically, but this is not a malfunction.  
[301] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Other information  
License  
Notes on the License  
This product comes with software that are used based on licensing agreements  
with the owners of that software. Based on requests by the owners of copyright of  
these software applications, we have an obligation to inform you of the following.  
Please read the following sections. Licenses (in English) are recorded in the  
internal memory of your product. Establish a Mass Storage connection between  
the product and a computer to read licenses in the “PMHOME” - “LICENSE”  
folder.  
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO  
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN  
WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC  
VIDEO”)  
AND/OR  
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED  
IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO  
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.  
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.  
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE  
On GNU GPL/LGPL applied software  
The software that is eligible for the following GNU General Public License  
(hereinafter referred to as “GPL”) or GNU Lesser General Public License  
(hereinafter referred to as “LGPL”) are included in the product.  
This informs you that you have a right to have access to, modify, and redistribute  
source code for these software programs under the conditions of the supplied  
GPL/LGPL.  
Source code is provided on the web. Use the following URL to download it.  
We would prefer you do not contact us about the contents of source code.  
Licenses (in English) are recorded in the internal memory of your product.  
Establish a Mass Storage connection between the product and a computer to  
read licenses in the “PMHOME” - “LICENSE” folder.  
[302] How to Use  
Precautions/This product  
Trademarks  
Trademarks  
The following marks are registered trademarks or trademarks of Sony  
Corporation.  
,
, Memory Stick,  
, Memory Stick Duo,  
, Memory Stick PRO Duo,  
, Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo,  
, Memory Stick Micro,  
, Memory Stick PRO,  
,
MagicGate, PhotoTV HD, InfoLITHIUM, PlayMemories Online, PlayMemories  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Online logo, PlayMemories Home, PlayMemories Home logo, PlayMemories  
Mobile, PlayMemories Mobile logo  
PlayMemories Camera Apps, PlayMemories Camera Apps logo  
Multi Interface Shoe, Multi Interface Shoe logo  
XAVC S and  
are registered trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
Blu-ray Disc™ and Blu-ray™ are trademarks of the Blu-ray Disc Association.  
AVCHD Progressive and AVCHD Progressive logotype are trademarks of  
Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.  
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks  
or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
Microsoft, Windows and DirectX are either registered trademarks or trademarks  
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
Mac is a trademark of Apple Inc.  
iOS is a registered trademark or trademark of Cisco Systems Inc.  
iPhone and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other  
countries.  
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.  
Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google  
Inc.  
Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi logo, Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks or  
trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.  
The N Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the  
United States and in other countries.  
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance.  
Eye-Fi is a trademark of Eye-Fi Inc.  
In addition, system and product names used in this manual are, in general,  
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective developers or  
manufacturers. However, the ™ or ® marks may not be specified in all cases in  
this manual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[303] Troubleshooting  
If you have problems  
If you have problems  
Troubleshooting  
If you experience trouble with the product, try the following solutions.  
1. Check the items under “Troubleshooting”, then check the product.  
2. Remove the battery pack, wait for about one minute, re-insert the battery  
pack, then turn on the power.  
3. Initialize the settings.  
4. Consult your dealer or local authorized service facility. Additional information  
on this product and answers to frequently asked questions can be found at  
our Customer Support Website.  
[304] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Battery pack and power  
You cannot insert the battery pack into the product.  
Make sure the direction of the battery pack is correct, and insert it until the  
battery lock lever is locked.  
Make sure that the battery is NP-FW50.  
[305] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Battery pack and power  
You cannot turn on the product.  
After inserting the battery pack into the product, it may take a few moments for  
the product to power up.  
Make sure that the battery pack is inserted correctly.  
The battery pack will discharge by itself even if you do not use it. Charge the  
battery pack before use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Make sure that the battery is NP-FW50.  
[306] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Battery pack and power  
The power turns off suddenly.  
Depending on the product and battery pack temperature, the product may turn  
off automatically to protect itself. In this case, a message is displayed on the  
product screen before the product turns off.  
[307] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Battery pack and power  
The battery pack discharges quickly.  
When [Remote Ctrl] has been set to [On], the power save mode will not  
function. Set [Remote Ctrl] to [Off] after using with a remote control.  
[308] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Battery pack and power  
The remaining battery level indicator shows an incorrect  
level.  
This phenomenon occurs when you use the product in an extremely hot or cold  
location.  
There may be a difference between the remaining battery level indicator and  
the actual remaining battery charge. Deplete the battery pack once, then  
charge it so that the remaining battery level indicator is reset. The correct  
remaining battery level indicator may not be displayed under some operating or  
environmental conditions.  
Battery capacity decreases over time and through repeated use. If decreased  
usage time between charges becomes significant, it is probably time to replace  
it with a new one.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
[309] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Battery pack and power  
The charge lamp on the product/the CHARGE lamp of  
the battery charger flashes when charging the battery  
pack.  
Make sure that the battery is NP-FW50.  
Batteries which have not been used for more than a year may have  
deteriorated.  
This phenomenon occurs when you charge the battery pack in an extremely hot  
or cold location. The optimum temperature for charging the battery pack is  
between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 °F and 86 °F).  
[310] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Battery pack and power  
The battery pack is not charged.  
When the battery pack is not charged (the charge lamp does not light) even if  
you follow the proper charging procedure, check if the power of the product is  
turned off, then remove the battery pack and re-insert the same battery pack  
securely, or disconnect and reconnect the USB cable.  
[311] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Battery pack and power  
The monitor does not turn on even when the product is  
turned on.  
[FINDER/MONITOR] has been set to [Viewfinder(Manual)]. Change  
[FINDER/MONITOR] to [Auto].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
[312] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
You cannot record images.  
You are using a memory card with a write-protect switch, and the switch is set  
to the LOCK position. Set the switch to the record position.  
Check the free capacity of the memory card.  
You cannot record images while charging the flash.  
The lens is not attached properly. Attach the lens properly.  
The [Self-timer] is activated.  
Set [Release w/o Card] to [Enable]. However, without a memory card inserted  
in the camera, images cannot be recorded.  
[313] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
Recording takes a long time.  
The noise reduction function is processing an image. This is not a malfunction.  
You are shooting in RAW mode. Since RAW data files are large, RAW mode  
shooting may take time.  
The [Auto HDR] function is processing an image.  
The product is compiling images.  
[314] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The same image is captured multiple times.  
Set the drive mode to [Single Shooting].  
The shooting mode has been set to [Superior Auto] and the [S. Auto Img.  
Extract.] has been set to [Off].  
[315] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The shutter is released continuously.  
The camera may automatically take multiple shots and perform overlay  
processing under the following conditions:  
[ISO] is set to [Multi Frame NR].  
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].  
The shooting mode is set to [Superior Auto].  
The shooting mode is set to [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] under [Scene  
Selection].  
[DRO/Auto HDR] is set to [Auto HDR].  
[316] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The image is out of focus.  
The subject is too close. Check the minimum focal distance of the lens.  
Ambient light is insufficient.  
[Focus Mode] has been set to [Manual Focus]. Set [Focus Mode] to a setting  
other than [Manual Focus].  
[317] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The angle of view changes little by little while shooting  
images.  
Depending on the lens you use, the angle of view may change little by little  
while focusing. This change in angle of view may be more evident when the  
focus mode is set to [Continuous AF] (AF-C) (including [Sports Action] in the  
Scene Selection function). This does not affect the actual recorded images.  
Consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility on  
compatible lenses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
[318] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
[Eye-Start AF] does not function.  
[
Eye-Start AF] is available only when a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA2, LA-EA4)  
(sold separately) is attached.  
Set [  
Eye-Start AF] to [On].  
[319] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
Zoom does not work.  
You cannot use zoom functions during Sweep Panorama shooting.  
You can use only the optical zoom in the following situations:  
When using Smile Shutter function.  
[
Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].  
[320] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The flash does not work.  
You cannot use a flash in the following situations:  
When the following modes are selected in [Scene Selection].  
[Anti Motion Blur]  
[Night Scene]  
[Hand-held Twilight]  
During Sweep Panorama shooting.  
During movie recording.  
[321] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
Fuzzy white circular spots appear on images shot using  
the flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Particles (dust, pollen, etc.) in the air reflected the flash light and appeared on  
the image. This is not a malfunction.  
[322] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The close-up shoot function (Macro) does not work.  
The product automatically adjusts the focus. Press and hold the shutter button  
halfway down. Focus adjustment may take some time when shooting a close  
subject.  
The close-up shoot function will not work when the following modes are  
selected in [Scene Selection]:  
[Sports Action]  
[323] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The recording date and time are not displayed on the  
screen.  
While shooting, the date and time are not displayed. They are displayed only  
during playback.  
[324] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The date and time are recorded incorrectly.  
Set the correct date and time.  
The area selected using [Area Setting] differs from the actual area. Select the  
actual area.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
[325] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The aperture value and/or shutter speed flashes.  
The subject is too bright or too dark to shoot using the current aperture value  
and/or shutter speed settings. Readjust the settings.  
[326] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The image colors are not correct.  
Adjust [White Balance].  
[Picture Effect] is set. Set [Picture Effect] to [Off].  
[Picture Profile] is set. Set [Picture Profile] to [Off].  
To reset settings to default, perform [Setting Reset].  
[327] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
Noise appears in the image when you view the screen in  
a dark place.  
The product is attempting to increase the visibility of the screen by temporarily  
brightening the monitor under conditions of low illumination. There is no effect  
on the recorded image.  
[328] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The eyes of the subject come out red.  
Set [Red Eye Reduction] to [On].  
Shoot the subject at a distance closer than the flash range using the flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Light the room and shoot the subject.  
[329] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
Dots appear and remain on the screen.  
This is not a malfunction. These dots are not recorded.  
[330] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
You cannot shoot images continuously.  
The memory card is full. Delete unnecessary images.  
The battery level is low. Insert a charged battery pack.  
[331] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The image is not clear in the viewfinder.  
Adjust the diopter scale properly using the diopter-adjustment dial.  
[332] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
No images appear on the viewfinder.  
[FINDER/MONITOR] has been set to [Monitor(Manual)]. Change  
[FINDER/MONITOR] to [Auto] or [Viewfinder(Manual)].  
Bring your eye close to the viewfinder.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
[333] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
No images appear on the monitor.  
If you shoot images at waist height when [FINDER/MONITOR] has been set to  
[Auto], the monitor will turn off due to the reaction of the eye sensor. Set  
[FINDER/MONITOR] to [Monitor(Manual)].  
[334] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
[Finder/Monitor Sel.] does not work even though it has  
been assigned to a certain key using [Custom Key  
Settings].  
[FINDER/MONITOR] is currently set to [Auto]. Set [FINDER/MONITOR] to  
[Viewfinder(Manual)] or [Monitor(Manual)].  
[335] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The image is whitish (Flare)./Blurring of light appears on  
the image (Ghosting).  
When pointing the lens toward the strong light source, excessive light enters  
the lens and the image may come out white (flare) or extraneous light (ghost  
images) may appear on the image, but this is not a malfunction.  
When using the zoom lens, attach the lens hood. Set up the composition so  
that you shoot images while avoiding backlit condition.  
[336] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The corners of the picture are too dark.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
If any filter or hood is used, take it off and try shooting again. Depending on the  
thickness of the filter and improper attachment of the hood, the filter or the  
hood may partially appear in the image. The optical properties of some lenses  
may cause the periphery of the image to appear too dark (insufficient light).  
You may compensate for this phenomenon with [Shading Comp.].  
When using an E-mount lens for APS-C size shooting, set [APS-C/Super  
35mm] to [Auto] or [On], then shoot the images.  
[337] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The image is blurred.  
Make sure that [SteadyShot] is set to [On].  
The picture was taken in a dark location without the flash, resulting in camera-  
shake. The use of a tripod or the flash is recommended. [Hand-held Twilight]  
and [Anti Motion Blur] in [Scene Selection] are also effective in reducing blur.  
If you are using [SteadyShot Adjust.] set to [Manual], check if the right focal-  
length is set.  
[338] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The monitor darkens after a short period of time passed.  
If you do not operate the product for a certain period of time, the product  
switches to the power-save mode. The product exits power-save mode when  
you perform operations such as pressing the shutter button halfway.  
[339] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The flash takes too long to recharge.  
The flash has been fired in succession in a short period. When the flash has  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
been fired in succession, the recharging process may take longer than usual to  
avoid overheating of the camera.  
[340] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The front dial, rear dial, or control wheel does not work.  
[Dial / Wheel Lock] is on. Hold down the Fn button until the lock is released, or  
set [Dial / Wheel Lock] to [Unlock].  
[341] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
Sound is not recorded properly.  
If you turn down the [Audio Rec Level] to the lowest sound level, audio will not  
be recorded.  
If you turn up the [Audio Rec Level] to the highest sound level, there will likely  
be sound clipping.  
[342] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
The camera vibrates while the power is on.  
The image sensor moves up/down/left/right due to an in-camera anti-blur  
mechanism. This is not a malfunction.  
[343] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting still images/movies  
Vibration or sounds occur when you shake the camera  
while the power is turned off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The image sensor vibrates or makes sounds due to an in-camera image sensor  
shift mechanism. This is not a malfunction.  
[344] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Viewing images  
Images cannot be played back.  
Make sure that the memory card is fully inserted into the product.  
The folder/file name has been changed on your computer.  
When an image file has been processed by a computer or when the image file  
was recorded using a model other than this product, playback on this product  
is not guaranteed.  
The product is in USB mode. Disconnect the product from the computer.  
Use PlayMemories Home to play back on this product images that are stored  
on your computer.  
[345] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Viewing images  
The date and time are not displayed.  
The screen display is set to display images only. Press DISP (Display Setting)  
on the control wheel to display the information.  
[346] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Viewing images  
The image cannot be deleted.  
Cancel the protection.  
[347] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Viewing images  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The image was deleted by mistake.  
Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. We recommend that  
you protect images that you do not want to delete.  
[348] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Viewing images  
A DPOF mark cannot be put.  
You cannot place DPOF marks on RAW images.  
[349] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Wi-Fi  
You cannot find the wireless access point to be  
connected.  
Wireless access points may not be displayed on the product due to signal  
conditions. Place the product closer to the wireless access point.  
Wireless access points may not be displayed on the product depending on the  
access point settings. Refer to the instruction manual of the wireless access  
point.  
[350] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Wi-Fi  
[WPS Push] does not work.  
[WPS Push] may not work depending on the access point settings. Check the  
SSID and password of the wireless access point, and perform [Access Point  
Set.].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
[351] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Wi-Fi  
[Send to Computer] is canceled halfway.  
When the battery remaining level is low, [Send to Computer] may be canceled  
halfway. Charge the battery pack and try again.  
[352] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Wi-Fi  
You cannot send movies to a smartphone.  
You cannot send XAVC S movies to a smartphone.  
You cannot send AVCHD movies to a smartphone. Set [  
[MP4] before recording movies.  
File Format] to  
[353] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Wi-Fi  
[Smart Remote Embedded] or [Send to Smartphone] is  
canceled halfway.  
When the remaining battery level is low, [Smart Remote Embedded] or [Send to  
Smartphone] may be canceled halfway. Charge the battery pack and try again.  
[354] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Wi-Fi  
The shooting screen for [Smart Remote Embedded] is  
not displayed smoothly./The connection between this  
product and the smartphone is disconnected.  
Data communication between this product and the smartphone may fail due to  
signal conditions. Place this product closer to the smartphone.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
[355] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Wi-Fi  
You cannot use One-Touch connection (NFC).  
Place the  
(N mark) on the smartphone and the  
(N mark) on the product  
as close together as possible. If there is no response, move the smartphone a  
few millimeters or move the smartphone away from this product, wait more  
than 10 seconds, and then touch them together again.  
[Airplane Mode] is set to [On]. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].  
Check whether the NFC function is activated on your smartphone. For details,  
refer to the instruction manual of the smartphone.  
Do not place any metal objects other than a smartphone near the  
(N mark).  
Do not contact two or more smartphones to this product at the same time.  
If another NFC-based application is running on your smartphone, terminate that  
application.  
Switch to shooting mode before touching the smartphone to the product. The  
application will not activate if the product is in playback mode.  
[356] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Computers  
The computer does not recognize this product.  
Set [USB Connection] to [Mass Storage].  
Check that the power of the camera is turned on.  
If the battery level is low, insert a charged battery pack.  
Use the micro USB cable (supplied) to connect the devices.  
Disconnect the USB cable, and connect it again firmly.  
Disconnect all equipment other than this product, the keyboard and the mouse  
from the USB terminals of your computer.  
Connect this product directly to your computer without passing through a USB  
hub or other device.  
If you set [USB Power Supply] to [Off], the computer may be able to recognize  
this product.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[357] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Computers  
You cannot import images.  
Connect this product and your computer correctly making a USB connection.  
When you shoot images with a memory card formatted by a computer, you may  
not be able to import the images to a computer. Shoot using a memory card  
formatted by this product.  
[358] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Computers  
The image and sound are interrupted by noise when  
viewing a movie on a computer.  
You are playing back the movie directly from the memory card. Import the  
movie to your computer using PlayMemories Home and play it back.  
[359] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Computers  
Images exported from a computer cannot be viewed on  
this product.  
Use PlayMemories Home to copy images that are stored on a computer onto a  
memory card inserted into this product and view them on this product.  
[360] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Memory cards  
Formatted the memory card by mistake.  
All the data on the memory card is deleted by formatting. You cannot restore  
the data.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
[361] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Printing  
You cannot print images.  
RAW images cannot be printed. To print RAW images, first convert them to  
JPEG images using Image Data Converter.  
[362] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Printing  
The color of the image is strange.  
When you print the images recorded in Adobe RGB mode using sRGB printers  
that are not compatible with Adobe RGB (DCF2.0/Exif2.21), the images are  
printed at a lower saturation.  
[363] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Printing  
Images are printed with both edges cut off.  
Depending on your printer, the left, right, top, and bottom edges of the image  
may be cut off. Especially when you print an image shot with [  
Ratio] set to [16:9], the lateral end of the image may be cut off.  
Aspect  
When printing images using your printer, cancel the trimming or borderless  
settings of the printer. Consult the printer manufacturer as to whether the  
printer provides these functions or not.  
When you print images at a shop, ask the shop whether they can print the  
images without cutting off both edges.  
[364] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Printing  
You cannot print images with the date.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
If you want to print images with the date, use [Print Setting] under [Specify  
Printing].  
You can print images with the date superimposed if the printer or the software  
can recognize Exif information. For compatibility with Exif information, consult  
the manufacturer of the printer or the software.  
Using PlayMemories Home (Windows version only), you can insert a date even  
into images that were taken without recording the date.  
When you print images at a shop, images can be printed with the date if you  
ask them to do so.  
[365] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Others  
The lens gets fogged.  
Moisture condensation has occurred. Turn off the product and leave it for about  
an hour before using it.  
[366] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Others  
The product becomes warm when you use it for a long  
time.  
This is not a malfunction. Turn off the product and do not use it for a while.  
[367] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Others  
The Clock Set screen appears when you turn on the  
product.  
Set the date and time again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The internal rechargeable backup battery has discharged. Insert a charged  
battery, and set aside for 24 hours or more with the power left off.  
[368] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Others  
The number of recordable images does not decrease, or  
decreases two images at a time.  
This is because the compression rate and the image size after compression  
change depending on the image when you shoot a JPEG image.  
[369] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Others  
Settings are reset even though resetting operation has  
not been performed.  
The camera settings may be reset if the battery pack is ejected while the power  
is on. When ejecting the battery pack, first turn the power off and check that  
the access lamp is not illuminated before ejecting.  
[370] Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Others  
The product does not work properly.  
Turn off the product. Remove the battery pack and insert it again. If the product  
is hot, remove the battery pack, and allow it to cool down before trying this  
corrective procedure.  
If an AC-PW20 AC Adaptor (sold separately) is used, disconnect the power  
cord. Connect the power cord and turn on the product again. If the product  
repeats the same error often or still does not work after trying these solutions,  
consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
[371] Troubleshooting  
Messages  
Messages  
Warning messages  
Set Area/Date/Time.  
Set the area, date and time. If you have not used the product for a long time,  
charge the internal rechargeable backup battery.  
Power insufficient.  
The cleaning mode will not operate when the remaining battery charge is less  
than  
(3). We recommend using the AC Adaptor AC-PW20 when using  
cleaning mode.  
Unable to use memory card. Format?  
The memory card was formatted on a computer and the file format was  
modified. Select [Enter], and then format the memory card. You can use the  
memory card again, however, all previous data in the memory card is erased. It  
may take some time to complete the format. If the message still appears,  
change the memory card.  
Memory Card Error  
An incompatible memory card is inserted.  
Formatting has failed. Format the memory card again.  
Unable to read memory card. Reinsert memory card.  
An incompatible memory card is inserted.  
The memory card is damaged.  
The terminal section of the memory card is dirty.  
Memory card locked.  
You are using a memory card with a write-protect switch or a delete-protect  
switch with the switch set to the LOCK position. Set the switch to the record  
position.  
Cannot open the shutter since the memory card is not inserted.  
No memory card has been inserted.  
To release the shutter without inserting a memory card into the camera, set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Release w/o Card] to [Enable]. In this case, images will not be saved.  
This memory card may not be capable of recording and playing normally.  
An incompatible memory card is inserted.  
Processing...  
When performing noise reduction, the reduction process takes place. You  
cannot do any further shooting during this reduction process.  
Unable to display.  
Images recorded with other products or images modified with a computer may  
not be displayed.  
Processing on the computer such as deletion of the image files may cause  
inconsistencies in the image database files. Repair the image database files.  
Cannot recognize lens. Attach it properly.  
The lens is not attached properly, or the lens is not attached. If the message  
appears when a lens is attached, reattach the lens. If the message appears  
frequently, check whether the contacts of the lens and product are clean or not.  
When attaching the product to an astronomical telescope or something similar,  
set [Release w/o Lens] to [Enable].  
Unable to print.  
You tried to mark RAW images with a DPOF mark.  
Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.  
The product has become hot because you have been shooting continuously.  
Turn the power off. Cool the product and wait until the product is ready to shoot  
again.  
You have been recording images for a long time, the product temperature has  
risen. Stop recording images until the product cools.  
Recording is unavailable in this movie format.  
Set [  
File Format] to [MP4].  
The number of images exceeds that for which date management in a database  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
file by the product is possible.  
Unable to register to the database file. Import all the images to a computer and  
recover the memory card.  
Image DataBase File error  
There is something wrong in the Image Database File. Select [Setup] →  
[Recover Image DB].  
System Error  
Camera Error. Turn power off then on.  
Remove the battery pack, and then re-insert it. If the message appears  
frequently, consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.  
Unable to magnify.  
Unable to rotate image.  
Images recorded with other products may not be enlarged or rotated.  
Cannot create more folders.  
A folder in the memory card has the first three digits “999.” You cannot create  
any more folders on this camera.  
[372] Troubleshooting  
Situations this product has difficulty handling  
Situations this  
product has difficulty handling  
Situations this product has difficulty handling  
The product cannot take full advantage of some features under certain  
circumstances.  
When shooting under the following conditions, either recompose the shot or  
change the shooting mode, then shoot the images again.  
Low light conditions  
Sweep Panorama  
Lock-on AF  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overly bright conditions  
Lock-on AF  
Varying levels of brightness  
Lock-on AF  
Flickering lights  
Sweep Panorama  
Subjects too close to the product  
Sweep Panorama  
Subjects with large movements or subjects that move too quickly  
Superior Auto  
Sweep Panorama  
Auto HDR  
Lock-on AF  
Subjects too small or too large  
Sweep Panorama  
Lock-on AF  
Scenes with little contrast, such as the sky or a sandy beach  
Sweep Panorama  
Superior Auto  
AF drive speed  
AF Track Sens  
Scenes changing constantly, such as a waterfall  
Sweep Panorama  
Superior Auto  
AF drive speed  
AF Track Sens  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sharp All in One Printer FO 4700 User Manual
Silvercrest Bread Maker SBB850EDSA1 02 10 V3 User Manual
Sony CRT Television KV XR25M81 User Manual
Sony MP3 Docking Station 4 125 804 111 User Manual
Sony VCR SLV SE830G User Manual
Specialized Home Gym Demo 8 User Manual
Superior Computer Drive SS2000MD4 User Manual
SVA Flat Panel Television VR2008W User Manual
Sylvania TV DVD Combo SRTD309 User Manual
Tangent DVD Player D 101 User Manual